1996 Ford Mustang Manual

File:01rcpim.
ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996
[PI00005(M )05/95]
thirty-six pica chart:

File:01rcpim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996
*[PI00400( ALL)09/95]
thirty-six pica chart:

File:01rcpim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996
*[PI00425( ALL)05/95]
Table of Contents
Introductory Information ............................... 1

Safety Restraints .............................................. 9
Starting Your Mustang ................................. 49
Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 61
Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 79
Steering Column Controls .......................... 91
Features .......................................................... 103
Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 141
Driving Your Mustang ............................... 177
Roadside Emergencies ................................ 199
Customer Assistance ................................... 215
Reporting Safety Defects........................ 222
Accessories .................................................... 227
Servicing Your Mustang ............................ 235
Quick Index .................................................. 305
Index ............................................................... 317
Gas Station Information ............................ 340
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the
*[IN00400( ALL)10/95] continuous commitment to achieve the best
result possible. It is dedication to learning what
you want, determination to develop the right
concept, and execution of that concept with care,
precision, and attention to detail. In short,
excellence means being the standard by which
others are judged.
*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles
*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the

quality of our products and services must be
our number one priority.
*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our

work must be done with you in mind,
providing better products and services than
our competition.
*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our

success. We must strive for excellence in
everything we do: in our products — in their
safety and value — and in our services, our
human relations, our competitiveness, and
our profitability.
*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life.

We are a team. We must treat one another
with trust and respect.
*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We

must maintain mutually beneficial
relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our
other business associates.
1
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct

worldwide must be pursued in a manner that
is socially responsible and commands respect
for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
*[IN01100( ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using

This Guide
Congratulations on the purchase of your new
*[IN01200( ALL)08/95] vehicle. This guide has information about the
equipment and the options for your new vehicle.
You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which
information applies to your vehicle, talk to your
dealer.
This guide describes equipment and gives
*[IN01300( ALL)08/95] specifications for equipment that was in effect
when this guide was approved for printing. Ford
may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without
incurring obligation.
*[IN01400( ALL)07/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

NOTES give you additional information about
*[IN01420( ALL)05/95] the subject matter you are referencing.
WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful
*[IN01440( ALL)05/95] in those areas where carelessness can cause
damage to your vehicle or personal injury to
yourself, your passengers or other people. Please
read all WARNINGS carefully.
*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
2
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
*[IN01500( ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

After you have read this guide once, you will
*[IN01600( ALL)04/95] probably return to it when you have a specific
question or need additional information. To help
you find specific information quickly, you can
use the Quick Index or the Index.
The Quick Index at the end of the book
*[IN01700( ALL)08/95] provides a page number following each item
which indicates where detailed information can
be found.
To use the Index, turn to the back of the book
*[IN01900( ALL)08/95] and search in the alphabetical listing for the
word that best describes the information you
need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We
have designed the Index so that you can find
information under a technical term.
%
*[IN02000( ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version
French Owner Guides can be obtained from your
*[IN02100( ALL)08/95] dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
% *[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and
Record Booklet
The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists
*[IN02500( ALL)03/95] the services that are most important for keeping
your vehicle in good condition. A record log is
also provided to help you keep track of all
services performed.
3
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
% *[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

[IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of
warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended
Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions
Warranties.
Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully
%
*[IN03100( ALL)03/95] to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and
your basic rights and responsibilities.
If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you
*[IN03250( ALL)03/95] can get a new one free of charge. Contact any
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the
addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
%
*[IN04000( ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan
If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can
*[IN04100( ALL)01/94] buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your
vehicle. This optional contract provides service
protection for a longer period of time than the
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle.
You do not have to buy this option when you
*[IN04200( ALL)01/95] buy your vehicle. However, your option to
purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs
out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your
dealer for more details about the Ford Extended
Service Plan.
If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not
*[IN04250( ALL)01/95] take advantage of the Ford Extended Service
Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be
eligible. See your dealer for the details.
4
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or
*[IN06100( ALL)03/95] break-in period during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in
period, you need to pay careful attention to how
you drive your vehicle.
%
*[IN06300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle
has new brake linings, you should take these
steps:
— Watch traffic carefully so that you can
*[IN06400( ALL)01/95] anticipate when to stop.
— Begin braking well in advance.
*[IN06500( ALL)01/95]
— Apply the brakes gradually.
*[IN06600( ALL)01/95]
The break-in period for new brake linings
*[IN06700( ALL)01/95] lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or
1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.
%
*[IN06800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford
recommends. See Engine oil recommendations
in the Index. Do not use special “break-in”
oils.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic
*[IN07000( ALL)04/95] Powertrain Control Module that limits engine
and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to
promote durability.
% *[IN07100( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage
*[IN07130( ALL)07/95] the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your
vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is
*[IN07160( ALL)07/95] exposed to chemical industrial fallout.
5
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not

*[IN07190( ALL)07/95] related to a defect in paint materials or
workmanship and therefore is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual
improvement in customer satisfaction is a high
priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its
dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000
miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes
first. Customers may be required to bring their
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford
representative.
%
*[IN07200( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the
*[IN07300( ALL)04/95] underside, with a mild detergent.
DO NOT:
*[IN07400( ALL)06/95]
*[IN07500( ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water
*[IN07600( ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct
sunlight
*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits
*[IN08100( ALL)04/95] and protect the finish.
6
File:02rcinm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996
%
*[IN08200( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild
*[IN08300( ALL)04/95] detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.
%
*[IN08400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are
*[IN08500( ALL)04/95] plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if
necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine
cleaning.
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents
*[IN08600( ALL)04/95] or petroleum-based cleaners.
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove
%
*[IN08700( ALL)04/95] oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil
remover. If rustproofing is not removed from
plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
7
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
Safety Restraints
%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and
*[SR00600( ALL)03/95] your passengers in case of a collision. In most
states and in Canada the law requires their use.
Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*[SR00800( ALL)08/95]
*[SR00900( ALL)08/95] ❑ the seatback is upright
*[SR01000( ALL)08/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
*[SR01100( ALL)08/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
*[SR01200( ALL)08/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
*[SR01300( ALL)08/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward
[SR01310(M )06/93] ❑ seat belt is placed in guide on top of seat
To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,
*[SR02100( ALL)07/95] a warning light may come on and a chime may
sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in
the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.
See the following sections in this chapter for
*[SR02500( ALL)07/95] directions on how to properly use these safety
belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this
chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
%
*[SR02600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers
wear safety belts. Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
9
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996

Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. Never swing it around the neck over
the inside shoulder. Never use a single
belt for more than one person or across
more than one seating position. Each
seating position in your vehicle has a
specific safety belt assembly which is
made up of one buckle and one tongue
that are designed to be used as a pair.
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision.

Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by a qualified technician
after any collision. Safety belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.

To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
10
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996

Lock the doors of your vehicle before
driving to lessen the risk of the door
coming open in a collision.
%*[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder

Belts
While your vehicle is in motion, the combination
*[SR03800( ALL)01/95] lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, corner hard or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt
locks and helps reduce your forward movement.
After you get into your vehicle, close the door
*[SR04100( ALL)05/95] and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position
that suits you best.
[SR04300(M )06/93] Before fastening the front seat belt, make sure
the shoulder belt passes through the belt holder
on the top of the seatback.
[SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder belt
from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of
the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure
the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make
sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
11
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR04555(M )03/95]
one third page art:0011200-B
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

(coupe models)
[SR04557(M )03/95]
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

(convertible models)
12
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR04650(M )03/95]
one third page art:0010502-A
Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt

coupe and convertible
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand

*[SR04675( ALL)07/95] Important Safety Belt Information at
the beginning of this chapter.
% [SR04678(M )03/95] Safety Belts for Front Passenger (Coupe
Only) and Rear (Coupe and Convertible)
Outboard Seating Positions
[SR04681(M )03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for
front seat passengers (coupe) and rear outboard
passenger seats (coupe and convertible).
Dual locking mode retractors operate in two
*[SR04682( ALL)08/95] ways:
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
*[SR04683( ALL)08/95]
[SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will allow the occupant freedom of
movement, locking tight only on hard braking,
hard cornering or impacts of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also
be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
13
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
Automatic locking mode

%
*[SR04685( ALL)08/95]
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
*[SR04686( ALL)03/95] retractor will be automatically locked and remain
locked when the combination lap/shoulder
safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the
occupant freedom of movement. This mode
provides the following:
*[SR04687( ALL)08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.

*[SR04688( ALL)08/95] ❑ Child seat or infant carrier installation
restraint.

Never install a rear-facing child seat or
infant carrier in the right front passenger
seat.
This mode must be used when installing a child
*[SR04690( ALL)09/95] safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear
outboard seats where dual locking retractors are
provided.
To switch the retractor from the emergency
*[SR04691( ALL)08/95] locking mode to the automatic locking mode,
perform the following steps:
1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
*[SR04692( ALL)08/95]
2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
*[SR04693( ALL)09/95] pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and, when allowed to retract, a
clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt
retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode).
3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard
*[SR04694( ALL)10/95] as the belt is allowed to retract.
14
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR04695( ALL)09/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder

belt is unbuckled and allowed to
retract completely, the retractor will
switch back to the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode. See the
detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
% [SR04696(M )03/95] Front Passenger Lap Belt Retractor
(Convertible Only)
[SR04697(M )10/95] Your convertible is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the lap belt part of the
lap/shoulder belt for the front seat passenger.
[SR04698(M )10/95] Dual locking mode passenger seat lap belt
retractors operate in two ways:
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
*[SR04699(M )08/95]
[SR04700(M )03/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor will
allow the occupant freedom of movement,
locking tight only on hard braking, hard
cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more. The retractor cannot be made
to lock by pulling on the belt.
Automatic locking mode
%
*[SR04701(M )08/95]
In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor will
*[SR04702(M )06/95] remain locked and does not allow the occupant
freedom of movement. This mode provides the
following:
*[SR04705(M )08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SR04710(M )08/95] ❑ Child safety seat installation.
[SR04715(M )03/95] This mode must be used when installing a
forward facing child safety seat on the front
passenger seat. To switch the retractor from
the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode to the automatic locking mode,
perform the following steps:
15
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
*[SR04720(M )09/95] RWARNING

seat.
[SR04725(M )03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below the
*[SR04730(M )06/95] child seat label. Pull upward until all of the
belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this
time, the lap belt retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (child restraint
mode).
3. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound
*[SR04735(M )03/95] will be heard as the belt retracts. This
indicates that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
4. Pull down on the belt to remove slack in the
*[SR04740(M )03/95] belt.
NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder
*[SR04745(M )08/95] belt is unbuckled and allowed to
retract completely, the retractor will
switch to the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode. See the
detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
16
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996

The lap belts should fit snugly and as low
as possible around the hips, not around
the waist.

Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing it around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for
more than one person.
[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:

[SR05900(MBC )06/93] 1. Push the release button on the end of the
buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch
from the buckle.
[SR06400(M )12/93]
quarter page art:0010559-F
Unfastening the front (coupes) and rear outboard

lap/shoulder belts
17
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR06500(M )08/93]
quarter page art:0010616-B
Unfastening the Mustang convertible front outboard

lap/shoulder belts
2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to

*[SR06600( ALL)03/95] its stowed position. If you do not guide the
tongue, it may strike you or part of the
vehicle.
[SR06800(M )05/94] 3. (Coupe only). Place the belt in the belt
holder at the top of the seatback. The
retracted belt should be stored on this holder
when not in use, except when a passenger is
entering or leaving the rear seat area of the
vehicle.
18
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR06801(M )08/93]
half page art:0011198-A
Belt holder location — coupe only
[SR06805(M )05/94] 4. (Convertible only). Place the shoulder belt in

the belt holder at the top of the seatback and
place the lap belt in the belt guide at the
side of the seat cushion. The retracted belt
should be stored on this holder and in the
belt guide when not in use, except when a
passenger is entering or leaving the rear seat
area of the vehicle.
19
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR06806(M )08/93]
half page art:0010624-B
Belt holder location — convertible only
[SR06820(M )08/93]
RWARNING
The shoulder belt must always be in the
belt holder when the belt is in use.
%
*[SR17500( ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly
For some people, the safety belt may be too
*[SR17600( ALL)07/95] short even when it is fully extended. You can
add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length
with a safety belt extension assembly (part
number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from your dealer.

Failure to follow these instructions will
affect the performance of the safety belts
and increase the risk of personal injury.
20
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
Use only extensions manufactured by the same

*[SR17705( ALL)08/95] supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the
webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended. Do not use extension
to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
%*[SR17710( ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Maintenance
Check the safety belt systems periodically to
*[SR17720( ALL)09/95] make sure that they work properly and are not
damaged.
All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,
%
*[SR17730( ALL)08/95] buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether
bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after any
collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies used in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the collision
was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation
is noted.
%
*[SR17740( ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts
Clean the safety belts with any mild soap
*[SR17780( ALL)06/95] solution that is recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the
belt webbing because this may weaken it.
21
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
% *[SR17800( ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)
The driver and right front passenger air bags are
*[SR18200( ALL)05/95] Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided
at these seating positions in addition to the
lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly
belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal
collisions. The supplemental air bag system does
not provide restraint to the lower body.
%
*[SR18400( ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts

Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle
occupants to be properly restrained and
help reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the
driver, should always wear their safety
belts, even when an air bag Supplemental
Restraint System is provided.
There are four very important reasons to use
*[SR18500( ALL)01/95] safety belts even with an air bag system. Use
your safety belts to:
*[SR18600( ALL)01/95] ❑ help keep you in the proper position (away
from the air bag) when it inflates
*[SR18700( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or
rear impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situations
*[SR18800( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions
that are not severe enough to activate the
supplemental air bag
*[SR18900( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your
vehicle
22
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
%
*[SR19100( ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated
In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely
*[SR19200( ALL)05/95] fast to help provide additional protection for
you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate
with considerable force. If you are not seated in
a normal riding position with your back against
the seatback, the air bag may not protect you
properly and could possibly hurt you as it
inflates.

If a passenger is not properly seated and
restrained, an inflating air bag could cause
serious injury.

Rear-facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seat.
[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is

closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly
inflating air bag could push the top of the
rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,
center console (if so equipped), or center
armrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED
IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety
seats and infant seats should be secured in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with a right front
*[SR19260( ALL)07/95] passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great
force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front
passengers, especially children and small adults,
must never sit on the front edge of the seat,
stand near the glove compartment of the
instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag
cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants
should sit with their backs against the seatback,
23
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
move the seat to the most rearward position if

possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should
use child or infant seats.
%
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
[SR19350(MBC )05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING

PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP
OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE
VEHICLE SEATBACK OR CENTER
CONSOLE/ARMRESTS. REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED
IN THE REAR SEAT.

Do not place objects or mount equipment
on or near the air bag cover on the
steering wheel or in front seat areas that
may come in contact with a deploying air
bag. Failure to follow this instruction may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
For additional important safety information on
*[SR19405( ALL)08/95] the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and
infant seats, please read the other sections of this
chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats
for Children.
24
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
For further information about the proper

*[SR19410( ALL)07/95] mounting of equipment in the front seat of this
vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled
Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be
obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.
Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
%
*[SR19500( ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System Operates
[SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering
wheel. The right front passenger seat air bag is
in the upper right hand section of the
instrument panel ledge above the glove
compartment. Both air bags are designed to stay
out of sight until they are activated.
[SR19900(M )03/93]
half page art:0010610-D
The location of the air bag and warning labels
25
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the

*[SR20800( ALL)05/95] severity of the impact and activates the air bags
if necessary. The air bag system is designed to
deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions
more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of
similar size and weight) head-on at about
28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed,
some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph
(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.
[SR20930( ALL)06/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takes
place in a matter of seconds.

Air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after
inflation.
*[SR21110( ALL)05/95]
Inflated driver side air bag
26
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR21130( ALL)10/94]
Inflated right front passenger side air bag

If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG
WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND
MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If
the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The air bag system uses a readiness light on the
*[SR22210( ALL)06/95] instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the
condition of the system. When you turn the
ignition to the ON position, this light will
illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and
then turn off. This indicates that the system is
operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the
air bag system is not required.
27
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
A problem with the system is indicated by one

%
*[SR22220( ALL)06/95] or more of the following:
[SR22225( ALL)05/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
or
[SR22230( ALL)05/95] ❑ it will not light immediately after the ignition
is turned on, or
[SR22240( ALL)05/95] ❑ a group of five beeps will be heard.
If any of these things happen, have the air bag
*[SR22250( ALL)08/95] system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag
Supplemental Restraint System may not function
properly in the event of a collision.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the Air Bag Supplemental
Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
%
*[SR22300( ALL)05/95] vehicles
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
*[SR22400( ALL)06/95] vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
%*[SR23500( ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children
In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law
*[SR23600( ALL)02/95] to use safety restraints for children. If small
children ride in your vehicle — this generally
includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or
less — you must put them in safety seats that
are made specially for children. Safety belts
alone do not provide maximum protection for
these children. Check your local and state laws
for specific requirements.
28
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996

Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.

Passengers should not be allowed to ride
in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a
seat with a fastened seat belt are much
more likely to suffer serious injury in a
collision. Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from shifting and causing
damage to the vehicle or harm to
passengers.
When possible, put children in the rear seat of
*[SR23900( ALL)06/95] your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.

Safety belts and seats can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
29
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996

Never leave a child unattended in your
vehicle.
%
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
%
*[SR25100( ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the
*[SR25200( ALL)05/95] size and weight of the child. Always follow the
safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when
installing and using the safety seat.
% [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety
seat in a seating position which is capable of
providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to
*[SR25250( ALL)08/95] use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating
position, and make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt
combination with a sliding tongue, make sure
the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg)
*[SR25275( ALL)06/95] should use child or infant seats. Forward facing
child seats must have the passenger seat moved
as far back from the instrument panel as
possible.
30
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
%
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD
NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT.
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST
ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR
SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions
could result in serious injury.
All child restraint systems are designed to be
*[SR25350( ALL)07/95] secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

If you do not properly secure the safety
seat, the child occupying the seat may be
injured during a collision or sudden stop.
An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR25520(MBC )07/95] RWARNING

Always keep the buckle release button
pointing upward and away from the child
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button as shown in
the following illustration.
31
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
% [SR30300(M )08/93] Installing Safety Seats in the Front Seat —

Convertible
[SR30400(M )08/93] Your Mustang Convertible is equipped with a
dual locking mode retractor on the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt at the front
passenger seat.
The automatic locking mode must be used when
*[SR30500(M )08/93] installing a child seat in the front passenger seat.
*[SR30505(M )09/95] RWARNING

seat.
[SR30600(M )08/93] If you choose to install a child safety seat in the
front seat:
[SR30700(M )08/93] 1. Position the child seat in the front passenger
seat of the vehicle.
[SR30705(M )08/93] 2. Pull up on the lap belt, Figure 1.
[SR30710(M )08/93]
32
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR30800(M )08/93] 3. Following the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions, route the lap/shoulder belt
through the child seat or infant carrier and
insert the belt tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage, Figure 2.
[SR31000(M )03/93]
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
33
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR31200(M )12/93] 4. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below the
child seat label. Pull upward until all of the
belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this
time, the lap belt retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (child seat restraint
mode), Figure 3.
[SR31300(M )06/93]
Pull the lap belt out completely to set the automatic

locking mode
34
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR31400(M )08/93] 5. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound

will be heard as the belt retracts. This
indicates the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode, Figure 4.
[SR31405(M )08/93]
Allowing belt to retract
35
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR31410(M )08/93] 6. Push down on the child seat while you pull
down on the belt to remove any slack in the
belt, Figure 5.
[SR31450(M )06/93]
Removing slack from the belt
36
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR31500(M )12/93] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat or

infant carrier, forcibly tilt the seat from side
to side, and also tug it forward to make sure
that the seat is securely held in place,
Figure 6.
[SR31600(M )08/93]
half page art:0010631-C
Checking that the seat is secure
37
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
[SR31700(M )08/93] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the

automatic locking mode. Try to pull more
belt out of the retractor, if you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode,
Figure 7.
[SR31705(M )08/93]
Checking the retractor
[SR31800(M )12/93] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat or

infant carrier is properly secured prior to
each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat
steps 4 through 8.
NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic
*[SR31850(M )05/95] lock mode, allow seat belt to retract
fully to its stowed position and the
retractor will automatically switch back
to the vehicle sensitive locking mode
for normal adult usage.
38
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
% [SR31855(M )12/93] Installing Safety Seats in the Front Seat

(Coupe only) and Rear Seating Positions
(Coupe and Convertible)
[SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a dual
locking mode retractor, use the following
procedure.
If you choose to install a child safety seat or
*[SR31865( ALL)06/95] infant carrier in the front seating positions, move
vehicle seat as far back as possible.
1. Position the child seat in the center of the
*[SR31870( ALL)06/95] passenger seat.
2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp
*[SR31875( ALL)09/95] shoulder belt and lap belt together. See
Figure 1.
*[SR31880( ALL)09/95]
Pulling out belt webbing
39
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

*[SR31885( ALL)08/95] portions together, route the tongue through
the child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be
sure that the belt webbing is not twisted.
*[SR31890( ALL)06/95]
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that

*[SR31893( ALL)08/95] seating position until you hear and feel the
latch engage. See Figure 3. Make sure tongue
is latched securely to buckle by pulling on
tongue.
40
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
*[SR31895( ALL)06/95]
Buckling the belt
5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and

*[SR31900( ALL)08/95] pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard. At this time,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child seat restraint mode). See
Figure 4.
NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must
*[SR31902( ALL)09/95] be in the automatic locking mode to
properly restrain a child.
41
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
*[SR31905( ALL)06/95]
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the

*[SR31910( ALL)08/95] shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be
heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Push down on the child seat while you pull
up on the belt to remove any slack in the
belt. See Figures 5 and 6.
42
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
*[SR31915( ALL)09/95]
Allowing shoulder belt to retract
*[SR31920( ALL)09/95]
Removing slack from belt
43
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
7. Before placing the child in the child seat,

*[SR31925( ALL)08/95] forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and
tug it forward to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place. See Figure 7.
*[SR31930( ALL)06/95]
Checking that the seat is secure
44
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
8. Double check that the retractor is in the

*[SR31935( ALL)08/95] automatic locking mode. Try to pull more
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode. See
Figure 8.
*[SR31940( ALL)06/95]
Checking the retractor
9. Check to make sure that the child seat is

*[SR31945( ALL)06/95] properly secured prior to each use. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4
through 7.
To remove the retractor from automatic lock
*[SR31950(M )06/95] mode, allow webbing to retract fully to its
stowed position and the retractor will
automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive
locking mode for normal adult usage.
45
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
%
*[SR38300( ALL)07/95] Safety Belts for Children
Children who are too large for child safety seats
*[SR38400( ALL)07/95] should always wear safety belts. (See instructions
with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,
to determine maximum size of child that will
safely fit in the seat.)

If safety belts are not properly worn and
adjusted as described, the risk of serious
injury to the child in a collision will be
much greater.
If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and
*[SR38600( ALL)07/95] shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does
not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder
belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the
vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on
*[SR38830( ALL)07/95] children who have outgrown child safety seats,
Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and
provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that
encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A
46
File:03rcsrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996
belt-positioning booster should be used if the

shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or
neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on
both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let
the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion
when the lower legs hang over the edge of the
seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your
pediatrician.

Do not use a belt-positioning booster with
a lap-only belt.
Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and
*[SR38900( ALL)07/95] shoulder belts should always be worn snugly
and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.

collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
47
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
Starting Your Mustang
*[ST03400( ALL)03/95] Ignition

*
% [ST03500( ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition
[ST03750( ALL)12/94]
The positions of the key in the ignition
% [ST03800(M )03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s

electrical accessories such as the radio and the
windshield wipers to operate while the engine is
not running. You must push the key release
button to turn to the ACCESSORY position if
your vehicle has a manual transmission.
% [ST04001( ALL)12/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the
automatic transmission gearshift lever.
LOCK is the only position that allows you to
*[ST04101( ALL)01/95] remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to
protect your vehicle from theft.
OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all
*[ST04200( ALL)03/95] accessories without locking the steering wheel or
the automatic transmission gearshift lever.
49
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning

*[ST04300( ALL)05/95] lights (except the brake system warning light) to
make sure they work before you start the
engine. The key returns to the ON position once
the engine is started and remains in this position
while the engine runs.
START cranks the engine. Release the key once
*[ST04400( ALL)03/95] the engine starts so that you do not damage the
starter. The key should return to ON when you
release it. The START position also allows you
to test the brake warning light.
%
*[ST04900( ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition
[ST05700(M )03/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or 1 (First) (manual
transmission).
2. Set the parking brake fully.
*[ST05800( ALL)01/95]
[ST06000(M )03/95] 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF (manual
transmission) or LOCK (automatic
transmission).
[ST06100(M )03/95] 4. Push in the key release button until it
catches and stays in (manual transmission
only).
[ST06250(M )03/95]
Key release button (manual transmission only)
[ST06500(M )03/95] 5. Turn the key to LOCK (manual

transmission).
6. Remove the key.
*[ST06600(M )05/95]
50
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
[ST06650(M )05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle has an automatic

transmission, the gearshift lever must
be in the P (Park) position to remove
the key from the ignition.
If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move
%
*[ST06675( ALL)05/95] the steering wheel left or right until the key
turns freely.
If the driver’s door is open while the key is still
%
*[ST06700( ALL)05/95] in the ignition, a warning chime sounds.
*[ST06800(M )05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is latched in
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1
(First) (manual transmission).
*[ST06875( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Do not leave children, unreliable adults,
or pets alone in your vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe and possibly fatal injuries to
people as well as animals.
%*[ST07000( ALL)10/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most
*[ST07100( ALL)10/95] important thing to remember is to avoid
pressing down on the accelerator before or
during starting. Only use the accelerator when
you have problems getting your vehicle started.
See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for
details about when to use the accelerator while
you start your vehicle.
51
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
*[ST07300( ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle

*
% [ST07400( ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle

Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.
Before you start your vehicle, do the following:
*[ST07600( ALL)01/95]
1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle
*[ST07700( ALL)08/95] buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints
in the Index for more details.
2. Make sure the headlamps and other
*[ST07800( ALL)03/95] accessories are turned off when starting.
[ST07900(M )03/95] 3. If you have an automatic transmission,
make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is set before you turn
the key.
[ST08000(M )03/95] If you have a manual transmission, make
sure that the parking brake is fully set, push
the clutch pedal to the floor, and put the
gearshift into Neutral before you turn the
key. The starter will operate only if the
clutch pedal is pushed in all the way.
Before you start your vehicle, you should test
*[ST08400( ALL)03/95] the warning lights on the instrument panel to
make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning
Lights and Gauges chapter.
52
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
%
*[ST10300( ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine
To start your engine:
*[ST10325( ALL)06/95]
1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start
*[ST10350( ALL)05/95] Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
*[ST10353( ALL)03/95]
3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when
*[ST10357( ALL)06/95] starting your engine. DO NOT use the
accelerator while the vehicle is parked.
4. Turn the key to the START position
*[ST10360( ALL)02/95] (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the
key to return to the ON position after the
engine has started.
*[ST10370( ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,

rotate the steering wheel slightly because it
may be binding.
For a cold engine:
%
*[ST10430( ALL)04/95]
*[ST10440( ALL)06/95] ❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If
the engine does not start in fifteen (15)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you
do not flood the engine, then try again.
*[ST10450( ALL)04/95] ❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the

engine does not start in five (5) seconds on
the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait
approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not
flood the engine, then try again.
For a warm engine:
%
*[ST10460( ALL)05/95]
*[ST10470( ALL)04/95] ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position
for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If
the engine does not start within five (5)
seconds on the first try, turn the key to the
OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the
starter stops, then try again.
53
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key

*[ST10473( ALL)08/95] as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
After you start the engine, let it idle for a few
*[ST10476( ALL)05/95] seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and
put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the
parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal
and drive away in the normal manner.
[ST10478( ALL)12/94] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock that
prevents you from shifting out of P
(Park) unless your foot is on the brake
pedal.
If the engine does not start after two attempts:
%
*[ST10480( ALL)04/95]
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
*[ST10492( ALL)04/95]
2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor
*[ST10494( ALL)04/95] and hold it.
3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.
*[ST10496( ALL)04/95]
4. Release the ignition key when the engine
*[ST10497( ALL)04/95] starts.
5. Release the accelerator gradually as the
*[ST10498( ALL)04/95] engine speeds up. Then drive away in the
normal manner.
If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump
*[ST10500( ALL)04/95] shut-off switch may have been triggered. For
directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel
Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.
A computer system controls the engine’s idle
*[ST11100( ALL)07/95] speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s
idle speed normally runs higher than when it’s
warmed up. These faster engine speeds will
make your vehicle move slightly faster than its
normal idle speed. It should, however, slow
down after a short time. If it does not, have the
idle speed checked.
54
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
If the engine idle speed does not slow down

*[ST11210( ALL)07/95] automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle
checked.

Extended idling at high engine speeds can
produce very high temperatures in the
engine and exhaust system, creating the
risk of fire or other damage.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero
*[ST11300( ALL)03/95] temperatures, use an engine block heater (if
your vehicle has this option).
%
*[ST11400( ALL)06/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)
Engine block heaters are strongly recommended
*[ST11500( ALL)03/95] if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater
warms the engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows
the heater-defrost system to respond quickly.
To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a
*[ST11700( ALL)02/95] grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that
you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a
ground fault circuit interrupter.

To prevent electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.
55
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
For best results, plug the heater in at least three

*[ST11900( ALL)03/95] hours before you start your vehicle. Using the
heater for longer than three hours will not
damage the engine, so you can plug it in at
night to start your vehicle the following
morning.
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block
*[ST12000( ALL)12/91] heater before driving your vehicle.
%
*[ST13100( ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
Carbon monoxide, although colorless and
*[ST13200( ALL)02/95] odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

Do not start your vehicle in a closed
garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in
a stopped vehicle for more than a short
period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding
Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for
more instructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems
*[ST13500( ALL)01/95] checked whenever:
*[ST13600( ALL)02/95] ❑ your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST13700( ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes
*[ST13800( ALL)01/95] ❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision
Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet
*[ST13900( ALL)01/95] vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.
56
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
[ST14000( ALL)12/94] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in

an open area for long periods of time, open the
windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, the
heating or air conditioning system should be set
to any function except MAX A/C or AUTO.
[ST14100(M )12/88] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed on
MEDIUM or HIGH with the function control
knob at any desired position.
[ST14150(M )12/88] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fan
speed on MEDIUM or HIGH with the
function control knob at any position except
OFF and the temperature control lever at
mid-position.
%*[ST17100( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
[ST17110( ALL)07/95] Fuel System Shut-off Switch
[ST17200( ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does
not start after a collision, the fuel system shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device intended to stop the fuel
system when your vehicle has been involved in
a substantial jolt.
[ST17410(M )12/94] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must
reset the switch by hand before you can start
your vehicle. The switch is on the left side of the
trunk near the left tail lamp.
57
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
[ST17500(M )09/93]
one third page art:0010012-D
The fuel pump shut-off switch

If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the
switch or try to start your vehicle. Have
all the passengers get out of the vehicle
and call the local fire department or a
towing service.
If your engine cranks but does not start after a
*[ST18800( ALL)03/95] collision or substantial jolt:
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
*[ST18900( ALL)04/95]
2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
*[ST19000( ALL)03/95]
3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red
*[ST19100( ALL)03/95] reset button down. If the button is already
set, you may have a different mechanical
problem.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for
*[ST19200( ALL)03/95] a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF
position.
58
File:04rcstm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996
5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking

*[ST19300( ALL)03/95] fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start
your vehicle again. If you do not see or
smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle
again.
6. Check all vehicle warning lights before
*[ST19350( ALL)03/95] driving the vehicle.
*[ST19400( ALL)01/95] Pushing

[ST19500(M )03/95] Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be
started by pushing. Vehicles with manual
transmissions should not be push started due to
possible catalytic converter damage. Follow the
directions under If Your Vehicle Needs a
Jump-Start.
59
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
Warning Lights and

Gauges
The instrument panel (dashboard) on your

%
*[LG00400( ALL)01/95] vehicle is divided into several different sections.
The illustrations on the following pages show
the major parts of the instrument panel that are
described in this chapter. Some items shown
may not be on all vehicles.
In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges
*[LG00450(M )06/93] are grouped together on the instrument panel.
We call this grouping a cluster.
61
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
% [LG01900(M )05/95]
full page art:0010106-K
Mustang GT instrument cluster
62
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
% [LG01950(M )05/95]
full page art:0011226-D
Mustang instrument cluster
63
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
[LG02710(M )06/93] The Cluster

[LG02715(M )06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are on
the cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges
alert you to possible problems with your vehicle.
Some of the lights listed are optional. The
following sections detail what each of these
indicators means.
%
*[LG02900( ALL)06/95] Brake System Warning Light
The warning light for the brakes can show two
*[LG03000( ALL)03/95] things — that the parking brake is not fully
released, or that the brake fluid level is low in
the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by a
qualified service technician.
[LG03050(M )05/95]
one inch art:0011354-A
[LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is

set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition key to START. It normally
goes off shortly after the engine starts and you
release the parking brake. If the light stays on
after you have fully released the parking brake,
have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
*[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes
may not be working properly. Have the
brakes checked immediately.
64
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
% [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light

(If equipped)
[LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time you
start your vehicle. If it remains on for longer
than five seconds, you should shut off your
engine and restart. If the anti-lock brake light
stays on, this indicates that the anti-lock feature
is disabled and should receive immediate
attention by a qualified service technician.
Normal braking is not affected unless the brake
warning light is also lit.
[LG03680( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0011194-B
*[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warning
light remains on or comes on while
driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon
as possible.
NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock
*[LG03800( ALL)10/95] system, and the brake warning light is
not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled
but normal brake function remains
operational.
% [LG03900(M )05/95] Low Oil Level Light (4.6L engines only)
[LG04000(M )06/93] This light indicates that the level of the oil in
your engine is low and you have to add more
oil. The light may glow for a moment when the
engine is started. If the light stays on while the
engine is running, check the engine oil.
65
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
[LG04025(M )06/93] 1. Park your car on level ground, and turn off
the engine and allow a few minutes for the
engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.
[LG04075(M )06/93] 2. Use the dipstick to check the oil. If the level
is low, add oil, but do not overfill. See
Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index.
[LG04100(M )12/91] If you are parked on a steep incline, the LOW
OIL LEVEL warning may come on when you
start your car, even though the oil is at the
correct level.
[LG04125(M )11/90] NOTE: The LOW OIL LEVEL warning will
stay on until you turn the ignition
OFF. After your car is on level ground,
wait five minutes to allow the oil to
drain back before turning the ignition
ON again.
[LG04200(M )06/93]
%
*[LG04300( ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
This warning light and chime remind you to
*[LG04305( ALL)09/95] fasten your safety belt. The following conditions
will take place:
*[LG04315(M )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key
is turned to the ON position, the light comes
on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime sounds
for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG04320(MBC )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is

on and the chime is sounding, both the light
and chime will turn off.
66
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
*[LG04325(M )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before the key is

turned to the ON position, the light will
come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime.
[LG04600( ALL)05/92]
%
*[LG04610( ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light
[LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light to
indicate the condition of the system. If the
system is functioning properly, the light will
stay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
[LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two things
may happen: the readiness light will either flash
or stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound.
If either of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.
[LG04640(M GV)05/95]
67
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
% [LG04650(M )05/95] Low Coolant Warning Light (4.6L Engine

Only)
[LG04660(M )03/92] This light tells you that the coolant is low inside
the coolant recovery bottle and that you should
add more coolant.
[LG04665(M )03/92] This light comes on for a few seconds when
your ignition key is turned to start, but should
turn off when the engine starts. If this light stays
on, check the level of coolant inside the recovery
bottle. See Engine Coolant in the Index.
[LG04670(M )05/95]
%
*[LG04700( ALL)01/95] Charging System Light
This light indicates that your battery is not being
*[LG04800( ALL)03/95] charged and that you need to have the electrical
system checked.
[LG04900( ALL)05/92]
This light comes on every time you turn the

*[LG05100( ALL)07/95] ignition to the ON or START position (engine
off). The light should go off when the engine
starts and the alternator begins to charge.
68
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
If the light stays on or comes on when the

*[LG05200( ALL)01/95] engine is running, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible.
% [LG05206(M )05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator (Automatic Only)
[LG05210( ALL)06/93]
[LG05225(M )03/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control
Switch (O/D) to the right of the gearshift lever
has been pushed. When the light is on, the
transmission will not shift into overdrive.
Depressing the button to the right of the shifter
will return the vehicle to “overdrive on” mode.
The transmission will be in the “overdrive on”
mode when the vehicle is started even if the
O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle
was last shut off. For more information see
Driving Your Mustang.
NOTE: If the light does not come on when the
*[LG05230( ALL)05/95] TCS is depressed or if the light flashes
when you are driving, have your
vehicle serviced at the first
opportunity. If this condition persists,
damage could occur to the
transmission.
69
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
%
*[LG07200( ALL)01/95] High Beam Light
This light comes on when the headlamps are
*[LG07300( ALL)03/95] turned to high beam or when you flash the
lights.
[LG07400( ALL)05/92]
%
*[LG11005( ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light
The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)
*[LG11015( ALL)05/95] system consists of the hardware and software
necessary to monitor the operation of the
powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain
control system during normal operation. If an
emission problem is detected, the Check Engine
Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.
Modification or additions to the vehicle may
*[LG11020( ALL)05/95] cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.
Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular
phones, and CB radios must be carefully
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping
into or running wires close to powertrain control
system wires or components.
[LG11045( ALL)09/95]
70
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
The light comes on briefly when you turn the

*[LG11050( ALL)05/95] ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when
the engine starts. If the light does not come on
when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes
on and stays on when you are driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with one of the
vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
If the light turns on and off at one (1) second
*[LG11055( ALL)05/95] intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it
means that the engine is misfiring. If this
condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
If the light turns on and off on rare occasions
*[LG11060( ALL)05/95] while you are driving, it means that a
malfunction occurred and the condition corrected
itself.
An example of a condition which corrects itself
*[LG11065( ALL)05/95] occurs when an engine running out of fuel
begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine
Warning Light may turn on and will then set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the
engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel
was being consumed. After refueling, the Check
Engine Warning Light will turn off after the
vehicle has completed three consecutive warm
up cycles without a misfire condition occurring.
A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a
cold condition (engine at ambient temperature)
and running until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine
*[LG11075( ALL)05/95] Warning Light will turn off as soon as the
engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to
have the engine serviced.
71
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
Under certain conditions, the Check Engine

*[LG111000(ALL )03/96] Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. If the Check Engine
Warning Light comes on and you suspect that
the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the
road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off
the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,
making sure it is properly seated.
After completing the three consecutive warm up
*[LG11200( ALL)05/95] cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the
Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If
the light does not go off after the fourth engine
restart, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer or a qualified technician.
%
*[LG11475(M )04/95] Anti-Theft Alarm Light (If equipped)
[LG11550(M )12/94] This light is used when you set the anti-theft
alarm system. See Anti-Theft System in the
Features chapter for more information.
%
*[LG12910( ALL)05/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the
*[LG12920( ALL)09/95] direction in which you are going to be turning.
[LG12950( ALL)06/93]
72
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
%
*[LG13000( ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge
[LG13075(M )05/95]
The fuel gauge
[LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately how

much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the
ignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gauge
indication after adding fuel, turn the ignition
switch OFF while refueling the vehicle.
[LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when
the vehicle is in motion. The most accurate
reading is obtained with the vehicle on level
ground.
With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge
*[LG13200( ALL)08/93] indicator may drift from the ignition switch ON
position.
%
*[LG13400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the temperature of the
*[LG13550( ALL)03/95] engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the
coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the
gauge indication will not be accurate.
[LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into
the NORMAL band as your engine coolant
warms up. Under normal driving conditions, the
pointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It is
acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the
NORMAL band under normal driving
73
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
conditions, and under certain driving conditions

such as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving up
hills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate at
the top of the NORMAL band.
[LG13650( ALL)06/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves
above the NORMAL band, the engine is
overheating and continued operation may cause
engine damage.
% [LG13725(M )05/95]
The engine coolant temperature gauge
If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG14100( ALL)01/95]
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG14200( ALL)03/95]
2. Turn off the engine.
*[LG14300( ALL)01/95]
3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE
*[LG14400( ALL)05/95] COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS COOL.
4. Check the coolant level following the
*[LG14500( ALL)04/95] instructions on checking and adding coolant
to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the
Index. If you do not follow these
instructions, you or others could be injured.
If the coolant continues to overheat, have the
*[LG14600( ALL)01/95] coolant system serviced.
74
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
%
*[LG14800( ALL)01/95] Speedometer
[LG14850(M )05/95]
The speedometer
The speedometer tells you how many miles

*[LG14900( ALL)01/95] (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.
%
*[LG15000( ALL)01/95] Odometer
The odometer tells you the total number of miles
*[LG15100( ALL)01/95] (kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.
%
*[LG15200( ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer
If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9
*[LG15300( ALL)03/93] miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply
set the trip odometer to zero by pressing the
reset button firmly when beginning the distance
you wish to measure.
Since the trip odometer displays distance
*[LG15350( ALL)01/95] independent of the odometer it will not always
advance to the next mile (kilometer) at the same
time as the odometer.
75
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
%
*[LG15450(MBC )02/95] Tachometer
[LG15500(M )05/95]
The tachometer
The tachometer displays the approximate engine

*[LG15600(MBC )01/95] revolutions per minute (rpm), or how fast the
engine is running.
[LG15700(M )06/93] The white zone shows the highest number of
engine revolutions per minute (rpm) at which
you should drive your car. Driving with the
pointer in the red zone may cause engine
damage.
% [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped)
This gauge shows you the battery voltage when
*[LG16225( ALL)05/94] the ignition key is in the ON position.
If the battery is operating under cold weather
*[LG16230( ALL)05/95] conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper
range of the NORMAL band while the battery is
charging. If you are running electrical accessories
with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or
the battery is not fully charged, the pointer may
move toward the lower end of the NORMAL
band.
If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your
*[LG16260( ALL)05/94] vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it
is safely possible.
76
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
[LG16280(M )05/95]
one third page art:0010577-C
Battery voltage gauge
%
*[LG16300( ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
[LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, not
the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level
is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the
engine running, the pointer should move into
the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below
the NORMAL band while the engine is running,
you have lost oil pressure and continued
operation will cause severe engine damage.
[LG16525(M )09/95]
Engine oil pressure gauge
77
File:05rclgm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996
If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG16600( ALL)03/95]
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG16700( ALL)03/95]
2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe
*[LG16800( ALL)04/95] engine damage could result.
3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the
*[LG16900( ALL)05/94] instructions on checking and adding engine
oil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you do
not follow these instructions, you or others
could be injured. To assure an accurate
reading, your car should be on level ground.
[LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessary
before you start the engine again. Do not
overfill. Do not operate the engine if the
pointer is below the NORMAL band,
regardless of the oil level. Contact your
nearest dealer for further service actions.
[LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, see
Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index.
78
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP00260(M )05/95]
full page art:0010099-K
Mustang instrument panel
79
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
The main controls for the climate control system,

%
*[IP00400( ALL)06/95] clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.
NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the
%
*[IP00500( ALL)09/95] gloss (shine) of the upper part of the
instrument panel should be avoided.
The dull finish in this area is to help
protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
% *[IP00600( ALL)06/95] The Climate Control Systems
[IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate
control systems. The two systems are:
[IP00710(M )06/93] ❑ an optional heating and air conditioning
system
[IP01100(M )03/94] ❑ a standard heating only system
If you are not sure which system your vehicle
*[IP01400( ALL)06/95] has, see the diagrams on the following pages.
% [IP01405(M )08/93] The Optional Heating and Air
Conditioning System
[IP01410(M )08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost
the windshield, and turn on the air conditioning
with the three knobs in the center of the
instrument panel:
[IP01415(M )08/93] ❑ FAN
[IP01420(M )08/93] ❑ TEMP
[IP01425(M )08/93] ❑ SELECT
80
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
[IP01430(M )05/95]
quarter page art:0010180-H
The knobs that control the optional heating and air

conditioning system
[IP01435(M )08/93] The heating system in the optional heating and

air conditioning system operates the same as the
heater only system. See The Heater Only System.
[IP01440(M )05/95] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather,
turn the SELECT knob to MAX A/C, turn the
TEMP knob all the way to the end of the blue
range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to HI.
MAX A/C uses recirculated air and is the most
fuel efficient way to cool your vehicle and can
also be used in heavy traffic to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. MAX A/C can
also be used in high humidity areas for more
efficient operation.
[IP01445(M )08/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows
open. This forces most of the hot, stale air out of
the vehicle and allows the air conditioning to
work faster.
% [IP01450(M )05/95] To cool your vehicle using outside air, turn the
SELECT knob to NORM A/C, turn the TEMP
knob all the way to the end of the blue range
(full left) and turn the FAN knob to the desired
speed between LO and HI. NORM A/C
provides quieter system operation than MAX
A/C.
81
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
[IP01455(M )08/93] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knob

should be left in any position other than MAX
A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This
allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the
outside air inlet duct.
% [IP01500(M )05/92] The Heater Only System
[IP01600(M )01/89] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost
the windshield, or use the vents by adjusting the
three knobs in the center of the instrument
panel:
[IP01700(M )08/93] ❑ FAN
[IP01800(M )08/93] ❑ TEMP
[IP01900(M )08/93] ❑ SELECT
[IP02000(M )05/95]
quarter page art:0010177-H
The knobs that control the standard heating only system
[IP02200(M )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle, turn the

SELECT knob to FLOOR, turn the TEMP knob
all the way to the end of the red range (full
right) and turn the FAN knob to HI. After the
vehicle is warm, the temperature and blower
speed can be adjusted to maintain a comfortable
temperature.
% [IP02600(M )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows,
turn the SELECT knob to Defrost symbol, turn
the TEMP knob to the end of the red range (full
right) and turn the FAN knob to HI.
82
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
[IP02700(M )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle and defrost

the windshield and side windows at the same
time, turn the SELECT knob to MIX, turn the
TEMP knob into the red range, as required, and
turn the FAN knob to the desired speed between
LO and HI.
% [IP02800(M )05/95] On mild days you may want to ventilate your
vehicle with outside air. Turn the SELECT knob
to VENT, turn the TEMP knob to the end of the
blue range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to
the desired speed. Air will be delivered through
the instrument panel registers.
[IP02900(M )03/94] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knob
should be left in any position except OFF when
the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to
“breathe” through the outside air inlet duct.
%*[IP31700(MBC )06/95] Rear Window Defroster
(If equipped)
The defroster for the rear window clears frost,
*[IP32000( ALL)12/91] fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside
of the rear window.
[IP32200(M )03/94] The button for the rear window defroster is
located on the left side of the instrument panel
below the headlamp switch.
[IP32500(M )08/93]
The button that controls the rear window defroster
83
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
[IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rear

window before using the defroster. With the
engine running, push the defrost button.
[IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster
will turn off. If the window is still not clear,
turn the defroster on again.
[IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition key
is turned to the OFF position.
The heating elements are bonded to the inside of
*[IP33300( ALL)02/95] the rear window. Do not use sharp objects to
scrape the inside of the rear window or use
abrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so could
damage the heating elements.
%*[IP34200( ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights
*
% [IP34310( ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System
(Canadian vehicles only)
*[IP34312( ALL)03/95]
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns
*[IP34320( ALL)03/95] the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced
light output, when:
*[IP34325( ALL)03/95] ❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position,

and
*[IP34330( ALL)03/95] ❑ The vehicle is running, and

*[IP34340( ALL)01/95] ❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking
brake.
NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn
*[IP34363( ALL)09/95] on in the flash-to-pass mode during
nighttime driving.
NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker
*[IP34365( ALL)01/95] when the vehicle is turned on or off.
This is a normal condition.
84
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
*[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
will not illuminate the tail lamps and
parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps
at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
%
*[IP34370( ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights
[IP34500(M )12/94] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side
markers, and tail lamps, use the control knob
that is to the left of the steering wheel.
[IP34510(M )08/93]
Headlamp switch location
[IP34900(M )05/95]
one third page art:0010194-D
The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps
85
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
[IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parking

lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
automatically turn on. But you can turn on the
parking lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
without turning on the headlamps.
For more information about how the high beams
*[IP36100( ALL)01/95] work, refer to the Steering Column Controls
chapter.
%
*[IP36200( ALL)08/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents
*[IP36300( ALL)08/95] or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these
may cause scratches or crack the lamps.
%
*[IP42400(M )04/95] Fog Lamps (If equipped)
[IP42600(M )06/93] The fog lamps switch is located on the console
to the left of the parking brake. The fog lamps
act as a supplement to the low beam headlamps
under limited visibility conditions such as rain,
snow, dust or fog and operate only when the
low beam headlamps are on.
[IP42750(M )08/93]
Fog lamp switch
[IP44200(M )03/95] ❑ To turn the fog lamps on, push the concave
side of the rocker switch. An indicator light
will glow when the lamps are on.
[IP44400(M )03/95] ❑ To turn off, push the raised side of the
switch.
86
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
%
*[IP44500( ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument
Panel
[IP44900(M )05/95] With the headlamp knob in the parking lamps
or headlamps position, you can brighten or dim
the lights on the instrument panel. To do this,
rotate the headlamp knob clockwise (to dim the
lights) or counterclockwise (to brighten the
lights). Rotate the knob fully counterclockwise to
operate the interior lights.
[IP45150(M )03/95]
The knob controls the light on the instrument panel and

the interior light
87
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
%
*[IP46300( ALL)01/95] Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps
Your vehicle has two map lamps for the
*[IP46425( ALL)01/95] passenger and the driver. To turn on the map
lamps, push the switch next to each lamp.
[IP46700(M )08/93]
Map lamp (convertible only)
[IP46725(M )08/93]
Front seat map and dome lamps (coupe only)
The dual beam map lamps are located on each

*[IP47010( ALL)01/95] side of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can be
turned on by the switches on the lamp.
88
File:06rcipm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996
%
*[IP47270( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps
Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are
*[IP47290( ALL)04/95] plastic and should be cleaned with a mild
detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear
water.
% *[IP47300( ALL)03/95] Clock
[IP47455(M )05/95]
The digital clock
[IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the H

button. When the desired hour appears,
release the button.
[IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the M
button. When the desired minute appears,
release the button.
%
*[IP49400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens
Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth
*[IP49500( ALL)04/95] and a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear
Spray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use
paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean the
lens as these may cause scratches.
89
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
Steering Column Controls
The controls on the steering column and wheel

*[SC00200( ALL)01/95] are designed to give you easy access to the
controls while you are driving.
%*[SC00300( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

You can use the turn signal lever on the left side
*[SC00400( ALL)01/95] of the steering column to:
*[SC00500( ALL)07/94] ❑ operate the turn signals

*[SC00600( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off
*[SC00700( ALL)05/95] ❑ flash the lamps
*[SC00800( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer
on/off
[SC01900( ALL)02/95]
The turn signal lever
%
*[SC02100( ALL)01/95] Turn Signals
Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move
*[SC02201( ALL)03/95] it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
91
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move

*[SC02301( ALL)03/95] the lever back to the center (off) position.
For lane changes, move the lever far enough to
*[SC02401( ALL)08/95] signal but not to latch. The lever will return to
the off position when you release it.
%
*[SC02700( ALL)05/95] High Beams
To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp
*[SC02800( ALL)05/95] control knob to the headlamp ON position and
push the turn signal lever away from you until
it latches. When the high beams are ON, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel comes on.
To turn off the high beams, pull the lever
*[SC02900( ALL)05/95] toward you until it latches. The high beam
indicator light turns off.
[SC02955(M )06/93] NOTE: The fog lamps will turn off if you put
high beams on while fog lamps are on.
%
*[SC03200( ALL)08/95] Flashing the Lights
To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward
*[SC03300( ALL)06/95] you for a moment and then release it. The
headlamps will flash whether the headlamp
knob is in the on or off position.
%*[SC03500( ALL)08/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer
To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition
*[SC03600( ALL)03/95] key must be turned to the ON or ACC position.
[SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you to
activate the wipers. The first seven detents are
interval wipe positions, the eighth detent is the
LO position and the ninth detent is the HI
position.
To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward
*[SC03800( ALL)01/95] you to the OFF position.
92
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
%
*[SC04100( ALL)08/95] Variable Interval Wipers
In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle
*[SC04205( ALL)01/95] has wipers that you can set to operate at
varying intervals. For example, you can set the
interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles
or more often in heavier rain.
[SC04700( ALL)02/95]
The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever
To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the

*[SC04900( ALL)03/94] end of the turn signal lever toward or away
from you until the wipers are going at the
desired interval.
*[SC05300( ALL)08/95] Windshield Washer

To clean the windshield, push in the end of the
*[SC05401( ALL)01/95] wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob
pushed in. After you release the knob, the
wipers operate for two to three cycles before
turning off (if the wipers were OFF) or
returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting
selected.
If the washer does not work, check the washer
*[SC05500( ALL)03/95] fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing
Your Mustang chapter. If there is enough fluid,
consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer.
93
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
Do not try to clean the windshield when the

*[SC05600( ALL)08/95] washer fluid container is empty or activate the
washers at any time for more than 15 seconds
continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
*[SC05700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solution
may freeze on the windshield and obscure
your vision. Always warm up the
windshield with the defroster before you
use the washer fluid. If you cannot see
through the windshield clearly, it can
increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
For information about refilling the washer fluid
*[SC05800( ALL)08/95] or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see
Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.
%*[SC05810( ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher
[SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations,
push in the hazard flasher on the top of the
steering column. The same switch turns the
flashers off.
The flashers work whether your vehicle is
*[SC05830( ALL)03/95] running or not. The flashers work for up to two
hours when the battery is fully charged and in
good condition without draining the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than
two hours or if the battery is not fully charged,
the battery can be drained.
94
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
[SC05865(M )12/93]
The control switch for the hazard flashers
%*[SC05900( ALL)01/95] Horn

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
*[SC06000( ALL)05/95] the steering wheel.
[SC06105(M )08/93]
The horn on the steering wheel
95
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
%*[SC07300( ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering

Never adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is moving.
[SC07700(MBC )03/93]
The lever to tilt the steering wheel
To change the position of the steering wheel,

*[SC08000( ALL)09/95] pull the release lever on the column toward you.
Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
96
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
%*[SC08600( ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

If your vehicle has speed control, you can
*[SC08800( ALL)06/95] automatically maintain a constant speed at or
above 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not
*[SC08900( ALL)06/95] Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or
in Canada the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
approved may cause the speed control to
malfunction. Therefore, use only properly
installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio
transmitting equipment in your vehicle.
[SC09000(M )05/95] NOTE: For vehicles equipped with 5-speed
manual transmission, it may be
preferable to drive in 4 (Fourth) gear in
mountainous areas or at high altitude
to improve speed control performance.
[SC09100(M )12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high
elevations, or when pulling a trailer, it
may be desirable to drive with the
transmission in the Overdrive off
mode. This can be done by depressing
the Transmission Control Switch (O/D)
to the right of the transmission gear
selection lever. Driving in this mode
prevents the transmission from shifting
excessively when ascending grades, and
helps maintain speed when going
down steep hills.
NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using
*[SC09200( ALL)09/95] the speed control. This will cause the
engine to overspeed.
[SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavy
load, significant speed drops may occur. If the
speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) the
automatic speed control will, by design, be
suspended. Some vehicles may require
97
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
temporary resumption of manual speed control

while ascending steep grades in order to
maintain the selected speed.
[SC09300(MBC )08/93]
The speed control switches on the steering wheel
To set the speed control:

*[SC10100( ALL)08/95]
1. Press and release the ON switch.
*[SC10300( ALL)08/95]
2. Accelerate to the desired speed above
*[SC10400( ALL)08/95] 30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator
pedal.
3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it
*[SC10800( ALL)08/95] immediately to set your speed. If you keep
this switch pressed, your speed will continue
to increase.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
*[SC10900( ALL)08/95] Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.
98
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your

*[SC11000( ALL)08/95] vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed
up, even though the speed control is on. This is
normal.
NOTE: If your speed increases above your set
*[SC11030( ALL)03/95] speed while driving in D (Drive) on a
downhill grade, you may want to
depress the Transmission Control
Switch located on the shift lever to
turn off overdrive to reduce vehicle
speed. Speed control cannot reduce the
vehicle speed if it goes above your set
speed on a downhill grade.
[SC11045(M )03/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 5
speed manual transmission, and if your
speed increases above your set speed
while driving in 5 (Fifth) gear on a
downhill grade, you may want to shift
to 4 (Fourth) gear to reduce vehicle
speed. Depressing the clutch pedal
cancels speed control, therefore speed
control must be reset by pressing the
SET/ACCEL or RESUME buttons.
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle
speed if it goes above your set speed
on a downhill grade.

Do not use the speed control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
99
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
%
*[SC11200( ALL)08/95] Accelerating With the Speed Control
Operating
You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up
*[SC11300( ALL)08/95] momentarily. When you take your foot off the
accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
%
*[SC11400( ALL)08/95] Resetting the Speed Control
To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use
*[SC11450( ALL)08/95] one of the following procedures:
[SC11500( ALL)05/94] ❑ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
*[SC11550( ALL)08/95] ❑ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle
attains the desired speed, press the SET
ACCEL switch and release it immediately.
% [SC11600(M GV)05/95] ❑ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly
release the COAST switch. Each time you
“tap” the switch, the set speed will decrease
by one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps
will cause the set speed to decrease in
increments of one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). For
example, if the current set speed is 60 mph
(96 km/h) five (5) taps of the COAST switch
will decrease the vehicle speed and SET it at
55 mph (88 km/h).
If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph
*[SC11650( ALL)08/95] (50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then
you must manually accelerate to a speed over
30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.
To reset the speed control to a higher speed,
*[SC11700( ALL)08/95] follow one of these procedures:
[SC11750( ALL)05/94] ❑ ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL
switch. Release the switch when the vehicle
has accelerated to the desired speed.
100
File:07rcscm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996
*[SC11800( ALL)08/95] ❑ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, press the
SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately.
% [SC11850(M GV)05/95] ❑ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the
SET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” the
switch, the set speed will increase by one (1)
mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the
set speed to increase in increments of one (1)
mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current
set speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) five (5) taps
of the SET ACCEL switch will increase the
vehicle speed and SET it at 60 mph
(96 km/h).
%
*[SC12800( ALL)08/95] Resuming a Set Speed
[SC12900(M )03/95] If you press the brake or clutch pedal, speed
control is suspended. You can return to the set
speed you set by pressing the RESUME switch,
as long as you did not press the OFF switch.
You must be driving at least 30 mph (48 km/h).
Your vehicle will gradually return to the
*[SC13400( ALL)05/95] previously set speed and then maintain it.
%
*[SC13501( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off
Press the OFF switch.
*[SC13601( ALL)08/95]
Speed control is also turned OFF each time the
*[SC13701( ALL)01/95] vehicle ignition is shut off.
101
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
Features
Your vehicle has a variety of features designed

*[FV00300( ALL)02/95] for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read
this chapter to find out about standard and
optional features.
%*[FV00400( ALL)01/95] Doors

*
% [FV01200(MBC )03/95] Anti-theft front door lock knobs
Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to prevent
*[FV01300(MBC )01/95] unlocking the door by pulling up on the lock
knob. To unlock and open the front door from
inside the vehicle, pull on the inside door
handle.
%
*[FV01400( ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the
controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel
of the front door. When you close the doors
after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked. If the power mechanism fails, the manual
door locks will override the power controls.
Pulling on a front inside door handle will
automatically override and release the front door
lock.
103
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV01900(M )10/95]
The power locks on the driver’s door
% *[FV03210(MBC )09/95] Anti-Theft Alarm System

(If equipped)
When armed, this system helps protect your
*[FV03220(MBC )05/95] vehicle against break-ins or theft.
When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system
%
*[FV03230(MBC )05/95] triggers and will:
*[FV03240(MBC )05/95] ❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and

alarm indicator lamp
*[FV03250(MBC )06/95] ❑ honk the horn

*[FV03260(MBC )05/95] ❑ disable the starting circuit to prevent the
vehicle from being started
104
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
NOTE: The factory installed Remote Entry

*[FV03270(M )05/95] System has a PANIC feature that also
chirps the vehicle horn and flashes the
interior/exterior lamps when the
PANIC button on the remote entry
transmitter is pushed. The PANIC
alarm and the Anti-Theft alarm are two
separate features. Both the anti-theft
alarm and the PANIC feature can be
active at the same time.
[FV03280(MBC )05/95] To tell the difference between a PANIC alarm
and a triggered Anti-theft alarm:
[FV03290(MBC )10/95] ❑ only the Anti-Theft alarm will cause the
alarm indicator lamp (located in the
instrument cluster) to flash on and off.
[FV03301(MBC )05/95] ❑ only the Anti-Theft alarm will disable the
start circuit so that the vehicle can not be
started.
[FV03310(MBC )05/95] ❑ the Anti-Theft alarm will not stop by pushing
the PANIC button on the Remote Entry
transmitter.
For more information on the PANIC alarm, see
*[FV03320(MBC )05/95] Remote Entry System in the Index.
Arming the system
%
*[FV03330(MBC )05/95]
[FV03340(MBC )05/95] To arm the system, do the following steps in
sequence:
1. Remove the key from the ignition. The hood
*[FV03350(MBC )07/95] must be closed to arm the system.
2. Open any door. The alarm indicator light
*[FV03360(MBC )05/95] will start flashing to remind you to arm the
system.
[FV03370(MBC )05/95] 3. Lock the doors by using the power door
lock switch or by pressing the remote entry
transmitter LOCK button.
[FV03380(MBC )05/95] The alarm indicator will now glow steadily.
105
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV03390(MBC )05/95] 4. Close all doors. The alarm indicator light

will then remain on steadily for
approximately 30 seconds and then go out.
When the light goes out, the system is
armed.
NOTE: Be sure to close all doors completely. If
*[FV03400(MBC )06/95] not, the alarm indicator light will
remain on. Remember, your anti-theft
system is armed only after the alarm
indicator light remains on steadily for
approximately 30 seconds after the last
door is closed, and then goes out.
[FV03410(MBC )05/95] You can also arm the anti-theft system by
following this sequence:
[FV03420(MBC )08/95] 1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Close all of the doors.
*[FV03430(MBC )05/95]
[FV03440(M )05/94] 3. Press the remote entry transmitter LOCK
button. The alarm indicator will come on for
30 seconds to show the alarm is arming and
then turn off to show that the alarm has
armed.
The anti-theft system is designed to work with
*[FV03450(MBC )05/95] the factory installed remote entry system. It may
not work with other remote entry systems.
Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system
%
*[FV03460(MBC )05/95]
You can disarm the system by:
*[FV03470(MBC )05/95]
[FV03480(MBC )05/95] ❑ unlocking a door with the key (turn the key
all the way to the end of travel or the system
may not disarm.
*[FV03490(MBC )05/95] ❑ using the UNLOCK button of the remote

entry transmitter
[FV03500(MBC )05/95] ❑ if remaining in the vehicle, turn the ignition
switch to ON or ACC
106
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
Triggering the alarm system

*[FV03510(MBC )05/95]
The armed system will be triggered if:
*[FV03520(MBC )05/95]
[FV03530(MBC )05/95] ❑ any door is opened without disarming the
system first (see previous paragraphs)
*[FV03540(MBC )10/95] ❑ the trunk lock cylinder is removed

NOTE: You can open the trunk with your key
*[FV03543(MBC )09/95] without setting off the alarm.
[FV03544(M )10/95] ❑ the hood is opened (except on GT/Cobra
vehicles)
[FV03546(M )10/95] ❑ the ignition key lock cylinder is forcibly
removed from the steering column (except on
GT/Cobra vehicles where the coded key
anti-theft system provides this protection).
Disarming a triggered system
%
*[FV03550(MBC )05/95]
The alarm can be disarmed by:
*[FV03560(MBC )05/95]
*[FV03570(MBC )05/95] ❑ unlocking a front door with the key
*[FV03580(MBC )05/95] ❑ using the UNLOCK button of the remote
entry transmitter
NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn
*[FV03582(MBC )09/95] will shut off automatically within 2
minutes 45 seconds after the system is
triggered. It will trigger again if
another intrusion occurs. However, the
starter circuit remains disabled until
the system is disarmed.
107
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV03583(M )05/95] Coded Key Anti-Theft System

(If equipped)
[FV03584(M )10/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the coded key
anti-theft system, you can only use an
electronically coded key to start the vehicle.
During each vehicle start sequence, the coded
key is read by the anti-theft system. If the key’s
ID code matches that in the anti-theft system,
the vehicle is enabled to start. If the key’s ID
code does not match the anti-theft system, or if
no coded key is detected, then the vehicle is not
able to start. Your vehicle was equipped with
two electronically coded keys. The coded
ignition key is larger than normal due to the
electronics located in the head of the key.
Additional spare keys, maximum of 14, can be
purchased either through your dealership or
selected retailers. Be sure to purchase only coded
keys with a Ford or Mercury logo on it to
ensure proper functionality. If both supplied
keys are lost or stolen, the vehicle must be
brought to the dealership for re-initialization.
(All keys must be brought to the dealer, if any.)
[FV03585(M )05/95]
quarter page art:0011372-A
108
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV03586(M )05/95] Theft Indicator

The indicator provides system proveout and
*[FV03587(M )10/95] operating status. The system activates the
indicator when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON or START position. This indicator helps
to determine possible fault conditions and/or
normal operating proveout. The system will
illuminate the indicator for two (2) seconds then
go out to acknowledge normal operating
conditions. If the indicator does not illuminate at
key ON or flashes, have the system serviced.
Spare Key Programming Procedure
*[FV03588(M )10/95]
Two electronically coded keys were supplied
*[FV03589(M )10/95] with your vehicle, use one of these with the
procedure below:
*[FV03590(M )10/95] ❑ Using a coded key that you can start your
engine with, turn the ignition from the ON to
the OFF position.
*[FV03591(M )10/95] ❑ Within 15 seconds, insert a new key into the

ignition and turn it to ON or START. The
vehicle does not have to be started.
If the key has been coded, the theft indicator
*[FV03592(M )10/95] will illuminate for two seconds. The key can
then be used to start the vehicle.
Repeat until all chosen keys have been coded
*[FV03593(M )10/95] (max=16).
If the key coding failed, the theft indicator will
*[FV03594(M )10/95] flash and the vehicle cannot be started. One of 3
causes are possible:
*[FV03595(M )10/95] ❑ The new key was not inserted within 15

seconds or
*[FV03596(M )10/95] ❑ All 16 key codes have been stored or

[FV03597(M )05/95] ❑ The key does not have an electronic code
109
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% *[FV08030( ALL)05/95] Remote Entry System

(If equipped)
If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you
*[FV08036( ALL)03/94] can lock and unlock the vehicle doors and open
the trunk without using a key. The remote also
has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the
system are located on the hand held
transmitter(s) that came with your vehicle.
The system will work with up to four
*[FV08040( ALL)06/95] transmitters. Your vehicle came with two
transmitters. Additional transmitters can be
ordered from your dealer.
The remote entry features only operate with the
*[FV08045(MBC )02/95] ignition in the OFF position.
[FV08050(MBC )02/95]
Remote entry transmitter
Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk

%
*[FV08055( ALL)02/95]
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK
*[FV08060( ALL)02/95] button.
To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK
*[FV08065( ALL)02/95] button a second time within five seconds of
unlocking the driver’s door.
To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button.
*[FV08070(MBC )02/95]
110
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
Locking the doors

*[FV08080( ALL)02/95]
To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.
*[FV08085( ALL)02/95]
If you would like a signal that the doors are
*[FV08090(MBC )01/95] being locked, press the LOCK button again
within five seconds. The doors will lock again,
the horn will beep and the low beam headlamps
and tail lamps will flash.
Activating the remote personal alarm
%
*[FV08114( ALL)02/95]
If you wish to activate the remote personal
*[FV08120( ALL)02/95] alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk
the horn and flash the low beam headlamps and
tail lamps for approximately two minutes and
forty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF by
pressing the PANIC button again or by turning
the ignition key to the RUN position.
[FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK,
TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry
system turns on the interior lights for 25
seconds. You can turn these lights off with the
LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the
RUN position. The interior lights will not turn
off if you have turned them on manually or if a
door is open.
Arming and disarming the alarm system
%
*[FV08200(M )05/95]
[FV08300(M )05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
factory installed anti-theft system, the remote
entry system will automatically arm it when the
doors are locked with the remote entry LOCK
button. The remote entry UNLOCK button will
disarm or reset a triggered anti-theft alarm.
The remote entry system is designed to work
*[FV08400(M )05/95] with the factory installed anti-theft system. It
may not work with other anti-theft systems.
111
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV08575(M )08/93] Using the Illuminated Entry System

[FV08600(M )08/93] If your vehicle has this option, the interior lights
turn on when you lift the outside door handle
on either front door, or when you press
UNLOCK, TRUNK, or PANIC on a programmed
remote entry transmitter if your vehicle is
equipped with remote entry.
[FV08625(M )09/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25
seconds or when you turn the ignition key to
ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if
you have turned them on manually or if a door
is opened.
% [FV08650(M )08/93] Battery Saver (With Remote Entry)
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will
*[FV08675(M )09/95] turn off battery voltage to the interior lights
after 45 minutes.
[FV08700(M )08/93] This will prevent draining of the battery if those
lights have been left on inadvertently or if a
door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to
these lamps will be restored when the outside
front door handles are lifted, the Remote Entry
transmitter is used to unlock the doors, activate
the personal alarm or open the trunk, or the
ignition key is turned on again.
Replacing the batteries
%
*[FV08725( ALL)02/95]
The remote entry transmitter is powered by two
*[FV08750(MBC )02/95] coin type three-volt lithium 2016
batteries (included) that should last for several
years of normal use. If you notice a significant
decrease in operating range, the batteries should
be replaced. Replacement batteries can be
purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
112
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
NOTE: The operating range of the remote

*[FV08775( ALL)02/95] entry system can also be affected by
weather conditions (such as very cold
temperatures) or structures around the
vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio
and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating
range will allow you to be up to 33
feet (10 meters) away from your
vehicle.
*[FV08800(MBC )02/95]
Replacing the batteries
The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace

*[FV08825(MBC )02/95] the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the
two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE
THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER
APART. When installing the new batteries, be
sure to place the positive (+) side down as
marked. Snap the two halves back together.
Replacement/additional transmitters
%
*[FV08850( ALL)02/95]
In the event a transmitter is lost, return the
*[FV08875(MBC )02/95] remaining transmitters to your dealer for
reprogramming of your remote entry system.
This is necessary to prevent further unauthorized
use of the lost transmitter.
Additional transmitters may be purchased from
*[FV08900(MBC )02/95] your dealer (remote entry system will work with
up to four transmitters). Return your existing
transmitters to your dealer so the remote entry
system can be reprogrammed with your new
and existing transmitters.
113
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF

*[FV08925( ALL)06/95] THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS
DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE
UNDESIRED OPERATION.
%*[FV08950( ALL)02/95] Windows
*
% [FV08975(M )03/91] Using the Power Windows (If equipped)
[FV08990(MBC )03/03] Each door has a power control that opens and
closes the window on that door. The driver’s
door has a master control panel that operates the
windows.
Power windows can only be opened or closed
*[FV09050( ALL)01/95] when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position.
*[FV09075( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the power
windows. They may seriously hurt
themselves. Make sure occupants are clear
of the window(s) before closing.
114
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV09100(M )03/95]
The master controls on the driver’s door — convertible

shown
To lock out all window switches except the

*[FV09400(M GV)05/95] master controls, press the window lock switch
once. To restore control to the individual
windows, press the switch again.
There is also an Express Down feature on the
%
*[FV09500(M GV)05/95] driver’s power window.
[FV09600(M GV)05/95] To operate, actuate driver’s power window
switch to the down position for less than 0.4
seconds; the window will then open
automatically. To terminate automatic operation
before the window completely opens, operate the
switch again, for less than 0.4 seconds, to either
the up or down position. Actuating the switch
for greater than 0.4 seconds provides
conventional power window operation. Closing
of the power window is conventional operation
only.
115
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%*[FV15700( ALL)01/95] Seats

*
% [FV15710( ALL)04/95] Head Restraints
If you use them properly, head restraints will
*[FV15720( ALL)04/95] help protect your head and neck in a collision.
A head restraint helps protect you best if you
*[FV15730( ALL)05/95] position it behind your head and not behind
your neck.
Standard head restraints
*[FV15740( ALL)02/95]
You can adjust the head restraints for your
*[FV15750( ALL)01/95] comfort and protection.
[FV15770( ALL)05/92]
Adjusting the head restraint
[FV15776(M )06/93] The four-way head restraint (standard on

GT models)
Your vehicle has the four-way head restraint.
*[FV15785(M )06/95] You can adjust it in four directions. You can
raise it two (2) inches (50 mm) from its normal
position, or you can move it forward up to 60˚
until you reach the desired position.
116
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV15790(M )07/93]
The four-way head restraint
% [FV15800(MBC )06/93] Adjusting Manual Seats

In the front seats, you can move the whole seat
*[FV16000( ALL)02/89] forward or backward or tilt the back of the seat
forward or backward.
[FV16100(MBC )05/92] To move the seats forward or backward:
1. Find the adjustment lever at the lower left
*[FV16300(M )06/95] corner of the front seat.
2. Push the lever to the left to unlock the seat.
*[FV16500(M )08/94]
3. Move the seat to the desired position.
*[FV16600( ALL)08/95]
4. Release the lever to latch the seat in its new
*[FV16800(M )08/95] position. Make sure the seat locks securely in
place.
117
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV17000(M )06/93]
The front seat adjustment lever
To recline the front manual seats:

*[FV17100(MBC )08/95]
1. On the side of the seat, find the handle for
*[FV17200( ALL)06/95] the recliner.
2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.
*[FV17300( ALL)08/95]
3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust
*[FV17400( ALL)01/95] it to the position you want. You can tilt the
seat back or bring it forward.
4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its new
*[FV17500( ALL)08/95] position.
[FV17510(M )06/93] NOTE: Seat back recline angle is restricted to
prevent interference with interior trim
panels on convertible models.

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback
when the vehicle is moving.

collision, always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
118
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%
*[FV17900(MBC )01/95] Seatback Recline
[FV18000(M )06/93]
Front seatback release levers
[FV18250(M )05/89] It is necessary to use the seatback release when

folding the back of the front seat forward for
rear seat passenger entry or exit. This release
handle is located on the lower outboard back of
the seat. The seatback locks automatically when
returned to the normal position.
[FV18275(M )03/95] To allow rear seat passenger access, use one
hand to pull up on the release handle while the
other hand pushes the seatback forward.
[FV18450(M )09/89]
RWARNING
Do not allow packages or other objects to
interfere with the normal positions of the
seatback or the emergency seatback
release. This may prevent the seatback
from returning to its upright latched
position and could cause personal injury.
119
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV18575(M )05/95] Using the Power Seat (If equipped)

[FV18750(M )05/95] If your vehicle has a driver side power seat, you
can adjust it in several directions. Using the seat
adjustment switch, located on the front outboard
corner of the driver’s seat, you can raise or
lower the whole front seat and move the seat
forward or backward.
[FV18835(M )03/92]
The seat controls on the driver’s seat

Do not pile cargo higher than the
seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a
collision or sudden stop.
120
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV19500(M )05/95] Sport Seat Controls (GT models)

% [FV19510(M )08/93] Using the Power Lumbar Supports
[FV19512(M )08/93] You can inflate a lumbar support pad in the seat
back. To inflate the lumbar pad, push the (+)
side of the rocker switch. To deflate push the (-)
side of the switch.
[FV19515(M )08/93] Using the Lateral Support Handwheel
(driver only)
[FV19520(M )08/93] To increase lateral support rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise. To decrease lateral support
turn the handwheel clockwise.
[FV19600(M )05/95]
half page art:0010262-G
GT seat controls
121
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%
*[FV19950(MBC )03/95] Rear Seat Entry
[FV19955(M )03/95] Coupe models
[FV20010(M )08/93]
Entering the rear seat (coupe)
[FV20100(MBC )03/95] The rotating boot on the lap belt is designed to

allow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat:
[FV20250(M )03/95] 1. Remove seat belt from seat belt guide on top
of front seat.
[FV20350(M )03/95] 2. Rotate the safety belt boot rearward.
[FV20403(M )03/95] 3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt.
[FV20406(M )03/95] 4. Rotate the safety belt boot forward and place
the belt in the belt guide on the seat back to
allow use by the front seat passengers.
122
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV20410(M )03/95] Convertible models

[FV20420(M )08/93]
Entering the rear seat (convertible)
[FV20425(M )03/95] To enter the rear seat:

[FV20430(M )03/95] 1. Remove the shoulder belt from the seat belt
guide on top of front seat.
[FV20435(M )08/93] 2. Remove the lap belt from the seat belt guide
on side of seat.
[FV20440(M )03/95] 3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt.
[FV20445(M )03/95] 4. Place the lap and shoulder belt into the
guides to allow use by the front seat
passengers.
123
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV20450(M )12/93] Folding Rear Seat (Coupe only)

[FV20455(M )12/93] To fold down the rear seats, gently pull on the
release straps.
[FV20460(M )12/93] NOTE: It may be necessary to apply slight
hand pressure to top of seatback while
pulling on release strap.
[FV20465(M )12/93]
Rear seat release straps
To raise the rear seatback:

*[FV20470(M )12/93]
1. Push the seatback upward until it locks in
*[FV20475(M )12/93] place.
[FV20480(M )12/93] 2. Make sure the seatback is firmly latched by
pushing forward and backward on it.
*[FV20485(M )05/95] RWARNING

Securely latch the seatback in the upright
position to prevent the seatback or objects
from being thrown forward during a
sudden stop or collision.
124
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%
*[FV20500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats
Leather and vinyl
*[FV20600( ALL)07/95]
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
*[FV20650( ALL)05/95] soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,
wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner
or a mild soap.
Fabric
%
*[FV20700( ALL)04/95]
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom
*[FV20750( ALL)05/95] or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots
immediately. Follow the directions that come
with the cleaner.
NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a
*[FV20775( ALL)09/95] small, hidden area of fabric. If the
fabric’s color or texture is adversely
affected by a particular cleaner, do not
use it.
% *[FV20800( ALL)01/95] Mirrors
[FV20810(M )03/94] NOTE: The mirror mount is designed to
detach from windshield during air bag
deployment. Excessive force and/or
excessive up, down, side-to-side
adjustment can cause mirror to detach
from windshield.
You can adjust your rearview mirror in any
*[FV20850( ALL)05/95] direction. The special swivel bracket lets you
move the mirror up or down and from side to
side.
[FV21000( ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Make sure you can see clearly through the
rearview mirror at all times. Do not block
your vision. If you cannot see through the
mirror, it could result in a collision,
injuring yourself and others.
125
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV21100(M )06/93] Rearview Mirror and Lamp Assembly

(convertible only)
[FV21200(M )03/94] This rearview mirror contains two lamps which
function as courtesy lamps when the doors are
open. These lamps also function as map lamps
when the doors are closed and the rocker switch
is activated.
[FV21300(M )08/93]
The rearview mirror with lamps
126
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV22700(M )06/93] Adjusting the Side View Mirrors

[FV24200(M C )06/93] The switch for controlling the dual electric
remote control mirrors is located on the driver’s
door.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror
%
*[FV24400( ALL)01/95] with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
[FV24520(M )03/95]
The mirror controls on the driver’s door
To adjust the side mirrors:

*[FV24700( ALL)04/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door
*[FV24800( ALL)01/95] panel.
2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the
*[FV24900( ALL)06/94] selector switch to R or L.
[FV25000( ALL)06/93] 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrows
for the direction you want to move the
mirror.
4. Return the selector switch to the middle
*[FV25100( ALL)06/94] position to keep the mirror in place.
127
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror

The side view mirror on the right is a convex
*[FV28800( ALL)02/94] mirror. This mirror gives you a wider view of
the lanes on your right and behind you.

The side view mirror on the right makes
objects appear smaller and farther away
than they actually are.
%*[FV28950( ALL)05/95] Sun Visors

*
% [FV29100( ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun
Visors (If equipped)
[FV29300( ALL)06/93] To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirror
cover.
[FV29700(M )08/93]
The mirror on the sun visor
128
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%*[FV30200(MBC )01/95] Console

[FV30350(MBC )06/93] Your vehicle has a full console. The full console
has the features shown in the illustration below.
[FV30400(M )08/93]
half page art:0010281-E
The features on the full console
129
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%*[FV32725(M GV)03/95] Power Point Electrical Outlet

[FV32750(M )10/95] The power point outlet is located on the console
to the right of the shift lever. This outlet should
be used in place of the cigarette lighter for
optional electrical accessories.
[FV32775(M )09/95] NOTE: Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigarette lighter.
Electrical system damage could occur.
[FV32801(M )08/93]
Power point electrical outlet
[FV32825(M )08/93] To access the outlet, flip the cover down.
130
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
%*[FV32875( ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments

Your vehicle may have several small storage
*[FV32900(M GV)01/95] compartments:
[FV32910(M )05/94] ❑ a glove compartment that locks.
[FV32920(M )05/94] ❑ if equipped with power windows, two map
pockets on the panels of the front doors.
[FV32923(M )05/94] ❑ center console storage compartment under the
arm rest that may be used for storage of CD’s
or cassettes.
[FV32924(M )05/95] ❑ coin holders located behind the ashtray. These
are deleted if fog lamps or convertible top are
ordered.

Do not put objects on the ledge between
the back seat and the rear window, as
they can become dangerous projectiles and
injure someone.
%*[FV33400( ALL)01/95] Trunk

*[FV33500( ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually
[FV33600(M )05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty of
room for storage:
[FV33700(M )06/93] ❑ coupe — 10.8 cubic feet (.31 cubic meters)
[FV33900(M )06/93] ❑ convertible — 8.5 cubic feet (.24 cubic meters)
To open and close the trunk from the outside:
%
*[FV34600( ALL)03/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock to the right of
[FV34900(M )06/93]
the license plate.
[FV35100( ALL)11/90] 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunk
opens.
[FV35300( ALL)11/90] 3. Remove the key before you close and lock
the lid.
[FV35450( ALL)06/93] 4. Shut the trunk lid completely.
131
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for the

Trunk (If equipped)
[FV36400(M )08/93] You can use the remote control inside your
glove compartment to unlock and open the
trunk. If equipped, you can also use your remote
entry system to open the trunk.
[FV36600(M )01/89]
The remote control for the trunk
% [FV37300(M )12/94] Convertible (If equipped)

[FV37650(M )09/95] NOTE: Do not store articles behind rear seat.
Articles stored in the convertible top
stowage compartment may break the
rear glass window when the top is
lowered.
% [FV38600(M )01/89] Lowering the Convertible Top
[FV38700(M )03/93] The convertible top can be lowered with the side
windows either up or down.
[FV38750(M )09/95] NOTE: CONVERTIBLE TOP WILL NOT
OPERATE UNLESS PARKING BRAKE
IS ENGAGED. Do not lower the top
while the vehicle is moving because
the top may be severely damaged.
Also, do not lower the top when the
top material is wet.
[FV38800(M )01/89] To lower the convertible top:
[FV38850(M )03/93] 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the
parking brake.
132
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV38855(M )06/93] 2. Check the convertible top stowage

compartment behind the rear seat to be sure
it is empty and ready to receive the top.
[FV38900(M )06/93] 3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header
at both the right and left sides by pulling
each clamp rearward until the hook in the
windshield header is free. The clamps are
flush with the header when in the closed
position.
[FV39000(M )06/93] 4. Close the windshield header clamps
immediately after disengagement, to avoid
cutting the top material and to permit
installation of the vinyl boot.
[FV39100(M )06/93] 5. If the top has not been lowered for some
time and sticks to the windshield header,
push the front of the top up slightly with
your hand to loosen it.
[FV39200(M )05/94]
Convertible top header clamps
[FV39700(M )05/94] 6. Push the convertible top switch on the

console in front of the armrest and hold
until the top is completely stored.
133
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV39710(M )06/93]
Convertible top switch
% [FV40200(M )03/93] Installation of the Boot

[FV40400(M )03/93] To install the boot:
[FV40501(M )05/95] 1. Insert boot tongue into groove located on
rear seat.
[FV40601(M )05/95]
134
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV40650(M )05/95] 2. Push boot forward until rear attachment

engages under molding.
[FV40701(M )05/95]
[FV40750(M )05/95] 3. Push forward flap of boot until both clips

engage under trim panel edge. Repeat on
other side of car.
[FV40801(M )05/95]
135
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV40901(M )05/95] 4. Tuck side attachments under molding.

Repeat on other side of car.
[FV40950(M )05/95]
[FV41001(M )05/95] 5. Push and pull front of boot to ensure tongue

is engaged into groove.
[FV41101(M )05/95]
136
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV41150(M )05/95] 6. Removal

[FV41201(M )05/95]
% [FV41600(M )01/89] Raising the Convertible Top

[FV41700(M )09/95] NOTE: CONVERTIBLE TOP WILL NOT
OPERATE UNLESS PARKING BRAKE
IS ENGAGED. Do not raise the top
while the vehicle is moving because
the top may be severely damaged.
[FV41800(M )01/89] To raise the convertible top:
[FV41850(M )02/93] 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Engage
the parking brake.
[FV41900(M )06/93] 2. Remove the boot cover, place it in the bag
and store it in the luggage compartment.
[FV41950(M )03/93] 3. Lower the front and rear side windows.
[FV42000(M )06/93] 4. Push the convertible top button in, holding it
until the top unfolds and moves forward
toward the windshield header.
[FV42100(M )03/93] 5. Open both top clamps before the top meets
the windshield header.
[FV42200(M )03/93] 6. Continue to use the top motor to raise the
top until it has reached the fully closed
position flush to the header.
137
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
[FV42300(M )03/93] 7. The two pins under the forward edge of the
top should seat themselves in the matching
holes in the header.
[FV42400(M )06/93] 8. To fasten both clamps securely, push the
clamp handles into the header on the top
until they are flush with the header. Pulling
down on the header at the center grip while
closing the latches may assist in fastening
the clamps.
[FV42410(M )03/93] 9. Raise the front and rear side windows.
% [FV42412(M )03/95] Convertible Top and Padded Molding Care
[FV42414(M )03/95] To avoid damage to the vinyl top and moldings,
use only an approved Ford cleaner, or
equivalent. Do not use stiff bristle brushes or
abrasive material or cleaners.
[FV42416(M )03/95] Hot waxes applied by automatic car washes can
affect the cleanability of vinyl material.
[FV42418(M )03/95] NOTE: Using high water pressure or wand
type car washes against the convertible
top and windows may cause water
leaks and possible seal damage.
138
File:08rcfvm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996
% [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat

[FV47600(MBC )08/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side
floor mat you must attach/detach the positive
location grommet from the hook on the floor.
The hook is just forward of the left hand track
of the driver’s seat.
[FV47800(MBC )08/93]
The positive location floor mat hook
139
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
% [AS21350(MBC )02/95]
full page art:0060641-B
Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette
141
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
% [AS21370(MBC )06/95] Electronic Stereo Cassette Radio

*[AS21400(MBC )08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
How to turn the radio on and adjust the
*[AS21500(MBC )08/95] volume
Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.
*[AS22050(MBC )10/95] Press it again to turn it off.
Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
*[AS22060(MBC )04/94] button to increase the volume. Press the left (s)
side of the button to decrease the volume.
Illuminated bars in the display show the relative
volume level.
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
*[AS22070(MBC )10/95] certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off, the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power was switched off.
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS22100(MBC )10/95]
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
*[AS22250(MBC )02/95] frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
How to tune radio stations
%
*[AS22300(MBC )10/95]
[AS22425(MBC )06/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station by using the Automatic Music Search
(“AMS”) button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to
the station or select the station by using the
memory buttons, which you can set to any
desired frequency.
142
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS22450(MBC )05/95] ❑ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune

your radio
[AS22650(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by first pressing the
“AMS” button, (display shows “TUNE”) then
pressing and releasing either the right a or
left b side of the “SEEK” button. To change
frequencies quickly, press and hold down
either the right or left side of the “SEEK”
button.
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
*[AS22700(MBC )10/95] allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS22800(MBC )10/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function

This feature on your radio allows you to
*[AS22900(MBC )09/95] automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
*[AS23150(MBC )01/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function

Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan
*[AS23175(MBC )06/95] mode. The radio will begin scanning up the
frequency band, stopping on each listenable
station for approximately a five-second
sampling. This continues until you press the
“SCAN” button a second time. The display
flashes “AM” or “FM.”
143
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS23200(MBC )10/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

Your radio is equipped with 6 station
*[AS23300(MBC )10/95] memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
*[AS23400(MBC )10/95] to the desired frequencies:
1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS23500(MBC )10/95]
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and
*[AS23700(MBC )10/95] hold the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
3. Follow the two steps above for each station
*[AS23800(MBC )10/95] memory preset button you want to set.
[AS23900(MBC )09/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,
the station memory preset buttons will
need to be reset.
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
*[AS24000(MBC )10/95] output of your radio
*[AS24100(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
*[AS24250(MBC )06/95] the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)
side of the “VOLUME” button to increase
bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease bass (less “lows”).
*[AS24300(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS24450(MBC )06/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)
treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S)
side to decrease treble (less “highs”).
144
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
Speaker features and operation

*[AS24500(MBC )08/95]
*[AS24600(MBC )10/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker balance
Balance control allows you to adjust the
*[AS24750(MBC )06/95] sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”
Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift
the sound to the left speakers.
*[AS24800(MBC )10/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader

Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
*[AS24950(MBC )06/95] distribution between the front and rear
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”
button to shift the sound to the front
the sound to the rear speakers.
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
*[AS24960(MBC )10/95] relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
%
*[AS25000(MBC )08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
*[AS25400(M )08/95] cassette tape player.
How to insert a tape
*[AS25500(MBC )08/95]
Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the
*[AS25600(MBC )08/95] right) firmly into the tape door opening, making
sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”
145
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS25700(MBC )08/95]
NOTE: The tape track or side number
*[AS25800(MBC )06/95] indicated in the display does not
necessarily correspond to the tape track
or side number on the cassette label. It
is used only to indicate when the tape
mechanism reverses tracks.
[AS25830(M )07/94] ❑ Using the Automatic Music Search
Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”
* [AS25850(MBC )09/95]
will appear in the display). Then, push the
left h button to rewind to the beginning
of the current selection or press the right
g button to fast forward to the beginning
of the next selection.
*[AS25950(M )09/95] ❑ Fast forwarding the tape

Push the right g button to fast forward
*[AS26000(MBC )08/95]
the tape.
*[AS26150(M )08/95] ❑ Rewinding the tape

Push the left h button to rewind the tape.
*[AS26200(MBC )08/95]
*[AS26900(MBC )08/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being
played
The alternate track (other side) of the tape
*[AS27000(MBC )06/95] can be selected at any time by pushing both
fast-wind buttons h and g at the same
time.
How to eject the tape
*[AS27100(MBC )08/95]
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
*[AS27250(MBC )08/95] “EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing.
Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature
*[AS27300(MBC )08/95]
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
*[AS27400(MBC )08/95] under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
146
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
Push the k/memory preset #3 button to

*[AS27500(MBC )08/95] activate. Push again to deactivate.
*[AS27600(MBC )08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and

Tapes
In order to keep your cassette tape player
*[AS27700(MBC )08/95] performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS27750(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to

clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS27800(MBC )08/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or

less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS27900(MBC )08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct

sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS28001(MBC )08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it

before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS28101(MBC )08/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become

lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting a cassette.
*[AS28200(MBC )08/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape

player when not in use. High heat in the
vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
147
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
% [AS28600(M )05/94]
full page art:0060665-A
Ford Mini Disc Player
148
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS28650(M )03/95] Ford Mini Disc Player

[AS28700(M )05/94] The Ford Mini Disc Player operates when the
Audio System is on and a disc is inserted (label
side up). (Be sure to read and follow all of the
care and cleaning instructions under How To
Take Care of Your Mini Disc Player and Discs in
this section.)
[AS28800(M )05/94] The digital display on your Mini Disc player
shows the track (selection) number and the disc
title.
[AS28900(M )05/94] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the Mini
Disc player will override that of the cassette
player or radio.
[AS29000(M )05/94] Using the Controls on Your New Mini
Disc Player
[AS29100(M )09/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and
fader controls on the radio are also
used with the Mini Disc player. Refer
to Using the Controls on Your New
Radio in this section for operating
instructions on these controls.
How to insert a disc and begin play
*[AS29200(M )10/95]
[AS29300(M )05/94] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc
opening. Arrow on top of disc must point
inward. When inserted, the disc automatically
loads into the unit and play starts at the
beginning of the first track (selection).
When the disc reaches the end, the disc player
*[AS29400(M )10/95] automatically returns to the beginning of the
disc and resumes playing.
NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc
*[AS29500(M )09/95] opening is secured to prevent the
accidental insertion of a second disc.
149
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS29600(M )09/95] NOTE: The Mini Disc player has heat

protection circuitry to protect the laser
diode. If the temperature of the player
reaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection
circuit will shut off the player and
“HOT” will appear in the display.
When the temperature is within normal
operating range, the “HOT” indication
will turn off and the Mini Disc player
will again be operational.
[AS29700(M )09/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF
during play and then is set to the ON
or ACCESSORY position, the Mini
Disc player will resume playing in the
mode it was in when ignition was
turned off.
[AS29800(M )05/94] How to fast forward or rewind your Mini
Disc player
[AS29900(M )03/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a
selection, press the right (e) side of the
“REV/FF” button (to fast forward) or the left
(f) side (to rewind). While either side of the
button is pressed, the disc goes forward or
backward at two different speeds depending on
how long the button is held down. (Pressing the
button for more than approximately 5 seconds
will speed up the process.) Release the button at
the desired point (found by watching the
elapsed playing time in the display or by
listening to the sound during fast forward or
rewind).
[AS30000(M )03/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by
keeping the fast forward (e) side of the
button pressed, the display will show the end
time of the last track and the sound will be
muted. When the fast forward (e) side of the
button is released, the player resumes play at
the beginning of the first track.
150
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS30200(M )05/94] Using the “SCROLL” feature

[AS30300(M )05/94] The scroll feature allows the display to scroll
through titles that are larger than 12 characters.
[AS30400(M )05/94] Press the “SCROLL” button to activate the scroll
feature.
[AS30420(M )05/94] Using the “AMS” feature
[AS30440(M )03/95] Pressing the right (e) side of the “AMS”
button advances the disc forward one track at a
time.
[AS30445(M )03/95] Pressing the left (f) side of the “AMS” button
brings the disc back to the beginning of the
current track. Pressing and holding the left
(f) or right (e) side of the “AMS” button
will scroll backward or forward respectively
through the tracks.
[AS30460(M )05/94] Using the display feature
[AS30480(M )07/94] Three different displays can be shown. Pressing
the “DISPLAY” button will toggle between track
# and disc title, song title, and track # and
elapsed time.
[AS30482(M )07/94] When a disc is ejected and another inserted, the
display will show the same selected display as
the disc that was ejected.
How to eject the disc
*[AS30500(M )10/95]
[AS30600(M )05/94] Push the “EJECT” button in the upper left
corner of your Mini Disc player to stop play,
eject the disc and resume radio or tape operation
of your audio system.
151
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
% [AS30700(M )11/94] How To Take Care of and Clean Your

Mini Disc Player and Discs
[AS30800(M )05/94] To ensure the continued performance, of your
Ford Mini Disc Player carefully read the
following precautions.
*[AS30900(M )08/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never

touch the playing surface.
*[AS31100(M )08/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as

benzine, thinner, commercially available
cleaners or antistatic spray intended for
analog records.
*[AS31200(M )08/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or

heat sources such as defroster and floor
heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a
parked car in direct sunlight where there may
be a considerable rise in temperature or
damage may result.
*[AS31300(M )08/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS31400(M )08/95] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try
to insert another disc. Doing so may damage
the disc player.
*[AS31500(M )08/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into

the disc player.
CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with
*[AS31600(M )08/95] this product will increase eye hazard as the laser
beam used in this compact disc player is
harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to
disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
152
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS31700(M )07/94] Common Operating Conditions of Your

Mini Disc Player
The following information is designed to help
*[AS31800(M )08/95] you recognize typical situations that could be
mistakenly interpreted as mechanical
malfunctions of the disc player.
*[AS31900(M )08/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded.

*[AS32000(M )08/95] ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface
downward.
*[AS32100(M )08/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS32200(M )05/95] ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above
167˚F (75˚C). Allow the player to cool off
before operating.
[AS32300(M )05/94] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may
produce discs with different dimensions or
tolerances, some of which may not be within
industry standards or in accordance with the
Mini Disc format. Because of this, a new disc
that is free of dust and scratches could be
defective and may not play on your Ford
Mini Disc Player.
If play does not begin after the CD button is
*[AS32400(M )09/95] pushed:
*[AS32500(M )08/95] ❑ The radio is not on.

*[AS32600(M )08/95] ❑ The unit is in the stop mode.
*[AS32700(M )08/95] ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses
within the unit. If this occurs, remove the
disc and wait approximately an hour until the
moisture evaporates.
If the sound skips:
*[AS32800(M )08/95]
*[AS32900(M )08/95] ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough
roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping
will not damage the disc player or scratch the
discs.
153
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
% [AS38050(M )02/95]
full page art:0060593-B
Ford Compact Disc Player
154
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS38075(M )05/95] Ford Compact Disc Player

The Ford Compact Disc Player operates when
*[AS38100(M )03/95] the Audio System is on and a disc is inserted
(label side up). Handle the disc by its edge
only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care
and cleaning instructions under How To Take
Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs in this
section.)
The digital display on your CD player shows the
*[AS38200(M )06/95] track (selection) number and the elapsed time.
Indicators for play a, stop X, compression on
(“COMP”) and shuffle on (“SHUF”) are also in
the display. (These features are described later.)
[AS38210(M )06/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD
player will override that of the cassette player or
radio.
%
*[AS38250(M )10/95] Using the Controls on Your New Compact
Disc Player
[AS38270(M )09/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and
fader controls on the radio are also
used with the CD player. Refer to
Using the Controls on Your New Radio
in this section for operating
instructions on these controls.
How to insert a disc and begin play
*[AS38300(M )10/95]
[AS38310(M )03/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc
opening. When inserted, the disc automatically
loads into the unit and play starts at the
beginning of the first track (selection). The play
indicator (a) lights up and the number “1”
(track) and “0:00” (elapsed time) are shown in
the digital display.
When the disc reaches the end, the disc player
*[AS38320(M )10/95] automatically returns to the beginning of the
disc and resumes playing.
155
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc

*[AS38330(M )10/95] opening is secured to prevent the
accidental insertion of a second disc.
[AS38340(M )03/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection
circuitry to protect the laser diode. If
the temperature of the player reaches
167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit
will shut off the player and “HOT”
will appear in the display. When the
temperature is within normal operating
range, the “HOT” indication will turn
off and the CD player will again be
operational.
How to stop and restart the CD player
*[AS38400(M )10/95]
[AS38450(M )03/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically
enters the play mode and the play indicator (a)
illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the
“PLAY/STOP” button. The stop indicator (X) in
the display illuminates and operation returns to
the radio or tape mode. To resume CD play,
press this button once again or press any other
function button (except “EJECT” or
“COMPRESS” buttons).
NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF
*[AS38475(M )10/95] during play and then is set to the ON
or ACCESSORY position, the CD
player will resume playing in the mode
it was in when ignition was turned off.
How to locate a selection on your CD
*[AS38500(M )03/95] player using Automatic Music Search (AMS)
An “AMS” (Automatic Music Search) control on
*[AS38510(M )06/95] your CD player allows you to quickly find a
particular selection on the disc. Press the left
f side of the “AMS” control to locate a
previous selection or the right e side of the
“AMS” control to locate a later selection.
156
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
How to fast forward or reverse your CD

*[AS38550(M )10/95] player
[AS38560(M )06/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a
selection, press the right (e) side of the
“REV/FF” button (to fast forward) or the left
(f) side (to rewind). While either side of the
button is pressed, the disc goes forward or
backward at two different speeds depending on
how long the button is held down. (Pressing the
button for more than a couple seconds will
speed up the process.) Release the button at the
desired point (found by watching the elapsed
playing time in the display or by listening to the
sound during fast forward or rewind).
When you have reached the end of the disc by
*[AS38580(M )06/95] keeping the fast forward e side of the button
pressed, the display will show the end time of
the last track and the sound will be muted.
When the fast forward e side of the button is
released, the player resumes play at the
beginning of the first track.
A “1” and “0:00” will appear in the display
*[AS38600(M )06/95] when the beginning of the disc is reached by
pressing the rewind f side of the button.
Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS38620(M )10/95]
Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan
*[AS38630(M )03/95] mode. The CD player will begin scanning the
disc, stopping on each listenable track for
approximately eight seconds. This continues until
you press the “SCAN” button a second time or
eject the disc. While in the scan mode, the
display flashes “SCAN.”
157
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS39050(M )07/94] Special Features of Your CD Player
*[AS39100(M )10/95] ❑ Compression

The compression feature will bring soft and
*[AS39110(M )10/95] loud passages closer together for a more
consistent listening level.
To turn the compression on, press the
*[AS39120(M )03/95] “COMPRESS” button. When on, the
compression indicator (“COMP”) will appear
in the display. Press the button again to turn
off.
*[AS39150(M )03/95] ❑ Shuffle

The shuffle feature on your CD player allows
*[AS39160(M )03/95] you to listen to your disc selections in a
different order. When this feature is
activated, your CD player will randomly
select and play tracks on the disc.
Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on,
*[AS39170(M )03/95] press it again to turn off. When on, the
shuffle indicator (“SHUF”) will appear in the
display. When the player is between
selections, the display will show a moving
dash (“s”) around the perimeter of the
display.
*[AS39200(M )03/95] ❑ Shuffle and Scan

Both the shuffle and scan features can be
*[AS39210(M )03/95] activated simultaneously. In this mode, the
player will randomly pick a selection and
play the first eight seconds. This process is
continued until either the “SCAN” button or
“SHUFFLE” button is pressed a second time.
*[AS39250(M )10/95] ❑ Automatic Disc Storage

[AS39260(M )03/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player but
is not removed from the disc opening within
approximately 15 seconds, the player will
automatically reload the disc for storage.
158
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
How to eject the disc

*[AS39300(M )10/95]
Push the “EJECT” button in the upper left
*[AS39310(M )06/95] corner of your CD player to stop play, eject the
disc and resume radio or tape operation of your
audio system.
%
*[AS41201(M )08/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD
Player and Discs
To ensure the continued performance of your
*[AS41301(M )08/95] Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the
following precautions:
*[AS41401(M )08/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never

touch the playing surface.
*[AS41501(M )08/95] ❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any

contamination. If needed, clean the disc with
an approved disc cleaner, such as the
DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the
Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping
from the center out to the edges. Do not use
a circular motion to clean.
*[AS41601(M )08/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as

benzine, thinner, commercially available
cleaners or antistatic spray intended for
analog records.
*[AS41701(M )08/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or

heat sources such as defroster and floor
heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a
parked car in direct sunlight where there may
be a considerable rise in temperature or
damage may result.
*[AS41801(M )08/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS41901(M )08/95] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try
to insert another disc. Doing so may damage
the disc player.
*[AS42001(M )08/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into

the disc player.
159
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with

*[AS42101(M )08/95] this product will increase eye hazard as the laser
beam used in this compact disc player is
harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to
disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
*[AS42201(M )08/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your

CD Player
The following information is designed to help
*[AS42301(M )08/95] you recognize typical situations that could be
mistakenly interpreted as mechanical
malfunctions of the disc player.
*[AS42401(M )08/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded.

*[AS42501(M )08/95] ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface
downward.
*[AS42601(M )08/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS42701(M )05/95] ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above
167˚F (75˚C). Allow the player to cool off
before operating.
*[AS42801(M )08/95] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may

produce discs with different dimensions or
tolerances, some of which may not be within
industry standards or in accordance with the
CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is
free of dust and scratches could be defective
and may not play on your Ford Compact
Disc Player.
160
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
If play does not begin after the CD button is

*[AS42901(M )09/95] pushed:
*[AS43001(M )08/95] ❑ The radio is not on.

*[AS43101(M )08/95] ❑ The unit is in the stop mode.
*[AS43201(M )08/95] ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses
within the unit. If this occurs, remove the
disc and wait approximately an hour until the
moisture evaporates.
If the sound skips:
*[AS43301(M )08/95]
*[AS43401(M )08/95] ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough
roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping
will not damage the disc player or scratch the
discs.
161
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
% [AS43457(M )05/94]
full page art:0060575-C
Mach 460 Sound System
162
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
[AS43459(M )03/95] Mach 460 Sound System

*[AS43460(MBC )08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS43470(MBC )10/95]
Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.
*[AS43480(MBC )10/95] Press it again to turn it off.
How to adjust the volume
*[AS43500(MBC )10/95]
[AS43510(MBC )06/95] Press the +/s side of the “VOLUME” button to
increase/decrease volume. Bars illuminate in the
display to show the relative volume level.
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
*[AS43520(MBC )10/95] certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off, the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power was switched off.
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS43530(MBC )10/95]
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
*[AS43540(MBC )02/95] frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
How to tune radio stations
%
*[AS43550(MBC )10/95]
There are four ways for you to tune in a
*[AS43560(MBC )10/95] particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or
select the station by using the memory buttons,
which you can set to any desired frequency.
These four methods are described below.
163
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS43570(MBC )09/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function

You can change the frequency up or down
*[AS43580(MBC )08/95] one increment at a time (FM changes in
increments of 200 kHz; AM changes in
increments of 10 kHz) by first pressing the
“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows
“TUNE”), then — within approximately five
seconds — pressing and releasing either the
right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK”
button. To change frequencies quickly, press
and hold down either the right or left side of
the “SEEK” button.
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
*[AS43590(MBC )10/95] allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS43600(MBC )10/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function

This feature on your radio allows you to
*[AS43610(MBC )09/95] automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
164
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS43630(MBC )01/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function

Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once
*[AS43640(MBC )03/95] enters the scan mode (display will indicate
“SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the
“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each
listenable station for approximately a
five-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)
side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan
mode down the frequency band, again
stopping on each listenable station for
approximately a five-second sampling.
To stop the scan mode on the presently
*[AS43650(MBC )10/95] sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”
button again.
*[AS43670(MBC )10/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

Your radio is equipped with 6 station
*[AS43680(MBC )10/95] memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
*[AS43690(MBC )10/95] to the desired frequencies:
1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS43700(MBC )10/95]
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and
*[AS43720(MBC )10/95] hold the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
3. Follow the two steps above for each station
*[AS43730(MBC )10/95] memory preset button you want to set.
165
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS43750(MBC )10/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

If no stations are in memory preset, you can
*[AS43760(MBC )10/95] activate the Auto Memory Load feature by
pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”
button for approximately three seconds.
Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons
in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking
out the first six strong stations for the
respective band and storing them in memory
buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of
strong stations from the FM band.)
With Auto Memory Store, you can
*[AS43770(MBC )10/95] continually set strong stations into your
memory buttons without losing your existing
memory presets, which is especially handy
while traveling. Your radio will automatically
set your memory buttons to the strong local
stations so you don’t have to continually
manually tune to existing stations.
Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the
*[AS43780(MBC )10/95] “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio
will set the first five strong stations of the
band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the
memory buttons. The display will show
“AUTO,” then run through the frequencies,
stopping momentarily on the stations being
set into the memory buttons. The radio is
now in the “AUTO” mode and the display
will show “AUTO” each time a preset is
activated.
NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong
*[AS43790(MBC )10/95] stations in the frequency band, the
remaining unfilled buttons will store
the last strong station detected on the
band.
166
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
After all stations have been filled, the radio

*[AS43800(MBC )10/95] will begin playing the station stored on
memory button 1.
To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode
*[AS43810(MBC )10/95] and return to the manually-set memory
button stations (or those stations set using
Auto Memory Load), simply push the
“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show
“AUTO” then “OFF.” The next time Auto
Memory Store is activated on that band, the
radio will store the next set of five strong
stations.
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
*[AS43830(MBC )10/95] output of your radio
*[AS43850(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
*[AS43860(MBC )06/95] the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)
bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)
side to decrease bass (less “lows”).
*[AS43870(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS43880(MBC )06/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until
the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)
treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S)
side to decrease treble (less “highs”).
*[AS43890(MBC )10/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker balance

Balance control allows you to adjust the
*[AS43900(MBC )06/95] sound distribution between the right and left
repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”
button to shift the sound to the right
the sound to the left speakers.
167
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS44010(MBC )10/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader

Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
*[AS44020(MBC )06/95] distribution between the front and rear
repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”
button to shift the sound to the front
the sound to the rear speakers.
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
*[AS44030(MBC )10/95] relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
%
*[AS44040(MBC )08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
*[AS44050(MBC )09/95] cassette tape player or eject a tape.
[AS44060(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balance
and fader controls in the same manner
as for radio stations.
How to insert a tape
*[AS44070(MBC )08/95]
Your cassette tape player is equipped with
*[AS44080(MBC )08/95] power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process. Display
indicates “M” (for metal/CrO2) while tape is
playing.
NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded and
*[AS44090(MBC )09/95] stored with the ignition and radio
power off.
168
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS44100(MBC )08/95]
There are four ways to quickly locate a desired
*[AS44110(MBC )08/95] selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.
Following are brief descriptions of each.
*[AS44120(MBC )09/95] ❑ Fast forwarding the tape

[AS44140(MBC )02/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will automatically begin
playing until fast forward is manually
stopped (by pushing the “PLAY PROG”
button) or the end of the tape is reached.
At the end of the tape, the direction
*[AS44160(MBC )01/95] automatically reverses and plays the other
side of the tape.
[AS44170(MBC )02/95] ❑ Fast rewinding the tape
[AS44180(MBC )02/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will automatically begin playing
when rewind is manually stopped (by
pushing the “PLAY PROG” button) or the
beginning of the tape is reached.
*[AS44190(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette

tape player
[AS44200(MBC )03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
(b) side to seek the beginning of the current
tape selection.
NOTE: If you want to restart a currently
*[AS44210(MBC )09/95] playing tape selection, press the left
(b) side of the “SEEK” button after
approximately three seconds into the
current selection.
Whirling sprockets in the display (l)
*[AS44220(MBC )08/95] indicate the direction of tape travel.
169
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
*[AS44230(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function with your

cassette tape player
Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the
*[AS44240(MBC )08/95] scan mode (display indicates “SCN”).
Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK”
button will begin the forward scan mode on
the tape currently playing, stopping on each
tape selection for approximately an
eight-second sampling.
Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK”
*[AS44250(MBC )08/95] button will begin the reverse scan mode,
stopping on each previous tape selection for
approximately an eight-second sampling.
While scanning, the display indicates whirling
sprockets plus an “S” (m).
To stop the scan mode on the presently
*[AS44260(MBC )08/95] sampled tape selection press the
“SCAN/TUNE” button again.
*[AS44270(MBC )08/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being

played
[AS44280(MBC )02/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
at any time by pressing the “PLAY/PROG”
button.
How to eject the tape
*[AS44300(MBC )08/95]
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
*[AS44310(MBC )08/95] “EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing if
the radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be
ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or
off.
170
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
How to store the tape

*[AS44320(MBC )08/95]
Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape
*[AS44330(MBC )08/95] player and resume radio play. The cassette will
be stored in the tape player and the X symbol
in the display will be lit until you push the
“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fast
forward and fast rewind can be used while the
tape is in storage mode without interrupting
radio play.
Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature
*[AS44340(MBC )08/95]
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
*[AS44350(MBC )08/95] under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise
*[AS44360(MBC )04/95] Reduction. Push again to deactivate.
Tape error messages
*[AS44490(MBC )08/95]
Your cassette tape player is equipped to
*[AS44500(MBC )08/95] diagnose certain problems you may experience.
Error codes are as follows:
Error 0 — Communication error between the
*[AS44510(MBC )08/95] radio controller and the tape controller. The
cassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tape
again. If the same error code appears, turn the
ignition off, then back on again and insert the
tape.
Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. The
*[AS44520(MBC )08/95] cassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert the
tape again. If the same error code appears in the
display, try a different cartridge.
171
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Your

*[AS44530(MBC )08/95] cassette tape player will go into the pause mode.
Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’t
eject, refer the problem to qualified personnel for
service.
*[AS44540(MBC )08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and

Tapes
In order to keep your cassette tape player
*[AS44550(MBC )08/95] performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS44560(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to

clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS44570(MBC )08/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or

less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS44580(MBC )08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct

sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS44590(MBC )08/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become

lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting cassette.
*[AS44600(MBC )08/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape

player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the
cassette to warp.
172
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
%
*[AS60900( ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions
Several conditions prevent FM reception from
*[AS61000( ALL)08/95] being completely clear and noise-free, such as
the following:
1. Distance/Strength
*[AS61100( ALL)08/95]
The strength of the FM signal is directly related
*[AS61200( ALL)08/95] to the distance the signal must travel. The
listenable range of an average FM signal is
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe
area and the signal becomes weaker.
NOTE: Always make sure your antenna
*[AS61300( ALL)06/90] (whether you have a power antenna or
a manually adjustable antenna) is fully
extended to the maximum length for
proper reception. If your antenna is not
fully extended, you may experience
signal loss while traveling in fringe
reception areas.
2. Terrain
*[AS61400( ALL)08/95]
The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of
*[AS61500( ALL)08/95] the area over which the signal travels may
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free.
If there is a building or large structure between
*[AS61700( ALL)08/95] the antenna and station, some of the signal
“bends” around the building, but certain spots
receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station
to return to normal.
When the radio waves are reflected off objects or
*[AS61800( ALL)08/95] structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and
distortion. Cancellation effects are most
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can
become quite severe in hilly terrain and
depressed roadways.
173
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono

*[AS61900( ALL)08/95] blend circuit has been incorporated into this
system. This feature automatically switches a
weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,
which improves the quality of reception.
Several sources of static are normal conditions
*[AS62000( ALL)08/95] on AM frequencies. These can be caused by
power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and
thunderstorms.
Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal
*[AS62100( ALL)08/95] Capture and Overload. This can occur when
listening to a weak station and when passing
another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the
displayed frequency does not change. While
passing the tower, the station may switch back
and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
When several broadcast towers are present
*[AS62200( ALL)08/95] (common in metropolitan areas) several stations
may overload the receiver, resulting in
considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM
*[AS62300( ALL)08/95] and FM bands has been incorporated into this
system to reduce strong signal capture and
overload.
%*[AS62400( ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
*[AS62500( ALL)08/95] and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies
that AM and FM radio stations may use for
their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are,
AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps;
FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz
steps.
174
File:09rcasm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996
Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given

*[AS62600( ALL)08/95] area. This radio will tune to each of these
frequencies using manual tune and no fine
tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use
other frequencies.
Some FM radio stations advertise a
*[AS62700( ALL)08/95] “rounded-off” frequency which is not the
frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM
broadcast frequency.
%*[AS62800( ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and Service
Information
*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] ❑ Warranty
Your sound system is warranted for three years
*[AS63000( ALL)08/95] or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer
for a copy of this limited warranty.
*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] ❑ Service

At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio
*[AS63300( ALL)08/95] systems with a comprehensive service and repair
program. If anything should go wrong with
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist
you.
175
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Driving Your Mustang
Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary

*[DR00200(M )06/95] depending on which type of transmission your
vehicle has.
[DR00300(M )03/95] ❑ an automatic overdrive transmission with
transmission control switch
*[DR00400(M )06/95] ❑ a manual transmission

%*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] Driving with an Automatic
Overdrive Transmission
[DR00510(MBC )05/94] The gearshift lever is floor mounted.
%
*[DR00800( ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
*[DR00950( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while you
move the gearshift lever from position to
position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move
unexpectedly and injure someone.
[DR00965(MBC )03/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignition

key must be turned to either the OFF or the ON
position and the thumb button must be pushed
in. This vehicle is also equipped with the brake
shift interlock safety feature which prevents
shifting the transmission out of the P (Park)
position without the brake pedal being
depressed if the key is in the ON position.
To operate:
*[DR00975( ALL)03/95]
1. Start the engine.
*[DR00980( ALL)01/95]
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
*[DR00985( ALL)01/95]
177
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

*[DR00990( ALL)01/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift
*
% [DR00995( ALL)04/95]
Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the
gearshift from being moved from the P (Park)
position until the brake pedal is depressed. This
feature is active when the ignition is in the ON
position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be
moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
*[DR01000( ALL)01/95] key.
2. Apply parking brake.
*[DR01005( ALL)01/95]
3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise
*[DR01010( ALL)01/95] to the first position (OFF).
4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift
*[DR01020( ALL)01/95] lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.

DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS
ARE WORKING.
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the
*[DR01027( ALL)07/95] alternate procedure described above, it is
possible that a fuse has blown and that your
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Mustang
in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking
and replacing fuses.
[DR01030(MBC )05/94] The console-mounted gearshift will lock in P
(Park) when you turn the key to the LOCK
position. When the gearshift is in any position
except P (Park), the ignition key cannot be
turned to LOCK or removed from the steering
column. TO REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift
lever must be in P (Park).
178
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
% [DR01200(M )03/93]
The positions of the console-mounted gearshift
Once the gearshift is secure in the desired

*[DR01500( ALL)11/94] position, release the brake pedal and use the
accelerator as necessary.
%
*[DR01700( ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)
With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,
*[DR01800( ALL)08/95] the vehicle will move backward. You should
always come to a complete stop before shifting
into or out of R (Reverse).
*[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

[DR01860( ALL)10/95] As in P (Park), there is no power transferred
through the transmission. However, the final
drive is not locked so the wheels are free to
rotate. The vehicle may be started in the N
position, but the ignition key cannot be
removed.
179
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
%
*[DR01900( ALL)01/95] Driving
[DR01945(M )05/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift is console-mounted on
the floor. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
is located on the console to the right of the
gearshift handle and is marked “O/D”. The
Transmission Control Indicator Light is located
on the instrument panel. You can put the
gearshift lever in any of the several positions.
[DR01951(MBC )03/95] The OVERDRIVE OFF light is off (not
illuminated) during normal vehicle operation.
This allows the transmission to upshift and
downshift from 1st through 4th gears. When the
TCS is pressed, the Transmission Control
Indicator Light will illuminate (O/D OFF) on the
instrument panel. When this O/D OFF is
illuminated the transmission will upshift and
downshift from 1st through 3rd gears.
[DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” when
the TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES”
when you are driving, have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition
persists, damage could occur to the transmission.
[DR01965(M )06/93] To return the transmission to normal operation
(1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS marked
“O/D” again. This switch may be used to cancel
overdrive any time the vehicle is being driven.
Each time your vehicle is started, the overdrive
system will automatically be in the normal
overdrive mode and the light will not be
illuminated.
When to use D (Overdrive)
%
*[DR02010(MBC )05/95]
Overdrive is the usual driving position for an
*[DR02100( ALL)01/95] automatic overdrive transmission. It works the
same way Drive works, automatically upshifting
or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows.
180
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth

*[DR02200( ALL)01/95] gear —an overdrive gear — when your vehicle
cruises at an appropriate consistent speed for
any length of time. This fourth gear will increase
your fuel economy when you travel at cruising
speeds.
[DR02500(MBC )05/95] When to use D (Overdrive) — with
transmission control switch activated (O/D
OFF light illuminated)
Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain
*[DR02600(MBC )01/95] terrain. If the transmission shifts back and forth
between Third and Fourth gears while you are
driving on hilly roads or if your vehicle does
not have adequate power for climbing hills,
depress the TCS.
[DR02606(M )06/93] You can depress the TCS marked “OD” at any
speed.
When to use 2 (Second)
*[DR02610( ALL)01/95]
Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads or
*[DR02620( ALL)01/95] to give you more engine braking to slow your
vehicle on downgrades.
When to use 1 (Low)
*[DR02700( ALL)01/95]
Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. It
*[DR02800( ALL)03/95] gives more engine braking to slow your vehicle
than 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You can
upshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from 1
(Low) to Overdrive at any speed.
*[DR03000( ALL)01/95] P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before you shift
*[DR03100( ALL)01/95] into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park). This locks the
transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
rotating.
181
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996

Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is securely latched
in P (Park).

Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running.
You can tell a console-mounted gearshift is
*[DR03400(MBC )01/95] securely latched in P (Park) if the lever is
adjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move it
without pushing in the thumb button.
% *[DR06100(M )03/95] Driving with a Manual
Transmission
%
*[DR06200(M )03/95] Using the Clutch
[DR06300(M )03/95] After starting the engine with the clutch pedal
pushed to the floor, allow it to idle for a few
seconds. Then, hold your right foot on the brake
pedal. Release the hand brake. Move the
gearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear.
[DR06400(M )03/95] To move the vehicle, pull your right foot off the
brake pedal and then slowly release the clutch
pedal. (You may need to press down slowly on
the accelerator at the same time that you release
the clutch pedal.)
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
*[DR06500(M )03/95] clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold
your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch
life.
Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may
*[DR06600(M )03/95] cause the vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing
or removing your other foot from the
accelerator.
182
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
%
*[DR06700(M )03/95] Shifting the Gears
[DR06800(M )03/95] The gearshift can be in one of seven possible
positions, as shown below.
[DR06950(M )03/95]
The positions of the floor-mounted gearshift
[DR07000(M )03/95] Always push the clutch pedal all the way in
when you shift. You should upshift according to
the speeds given in the chart in this section.
%
*[DR07100(M )03/95] Backing up
To shift into R (Reverse):
*[DR07200(M )03/95]
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
*[DR07300(M )05/95]
[DR07400(M )03/95] 2. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the
floor.
[DR07550(M )03/95] 3. Then move the gearshift all the way to the
right and pull it back into R (Reverse).
[DR07800(M )03/95] 4. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release
the clutch pedal from the floor.
[DR07900(M )03/95] If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push
the clutch pedal in while you put the gearshift
back into Neutral. Then, release the clutch pedal
for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 4.
183
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Upshifting
%
*[DR08000(M )05/95]
Most of the time, you should upshift at the
*[DR08100(M )03/95] following speeds:
[DR08200(M )03/93] Shift Speeds for 3.8L Engine Models
[DR08300(M )03/91]
eight pica chart:0010311-C
[DR08400(M )03/95] Shift Speeds for 4.6L Engine Models

[DR08500(M )03/91]
eight pica chart:0010312-C
[DR08800(M )03/95] * In these gears, you may sometimes shift at

lower speeds than those we suggest to improve
fuel economy.
[DR08900(M )03/95] Sometimes, you will upshift at higher speeds.
For example, you may want to stay in a lower
gear to gain more power for passing or for
climbing a hill. However, you must stay within
the allowable tachometer range when you
upshift or downshift. See Tachometer in the
Index.
184
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Downshifting
%
*[DR09000(M )05/95]
When you slow down or climb a steep hill,
*[DR09100(M )03/95] always downshift before the engine starts to lose
power. Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration
to increase speed again.
When you drive down steep hills, downshifting
*[DR09200(M )03/95] helps you keep a safe speed and helps prevent
unnecessary wear on the brakes.
When you come to a stop, do not downshift
*[DR09300(M )03/95] through each gear. Disengage the clutch and use
the brake as necessary. Downshifting through
the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel economy.
[DR09400(M )03/95] NOTE: Do not downshift into 1 (First) when
your vehicle is moving faster than
15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage
the clutch.
Parking
*[DR09500(M )03/95]
To park your vehicle, shift into 1 (First), set the
*[DR09600(M )03/95] parking brake fully, and turn off the ignition.
*[DR09700(M )05/95] RWARNING

Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it
may move unexpectedly and injure
someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
% [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped)

[DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a
poor traction surface. Under normal conditions
the Traction-Lok axle functions as a standard
rear axle.
185
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Extended use of other than matching size tires

*[DR09740( ALL)03/93] on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of
effectiveness does not affect normal driving and
should not be noticeable to the driver.

To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
%*[DR09800( ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle

Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power
*
% [DR09900( ALL)01/95]
steering uses energy from the engine to help
steer your vehicle.
If the amount of effort needed to steer your
%
*[DR09950( ALL)04/95] vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have
the power steering system checked. If the power
steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually
but it takes more effort.
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme
*[DR10000( ALL)01/95] right or left for more than five seconds if the
engine is running. This can damage the power
steering pump.
%*[DR10500( ALL)03/95] Brakes
*
% [DR10600( ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes
[DR10650( ALL)06/95] Braking non ABS models
[DR10700(M )10/95] All models have power 4-wheel disc brakes
(anti-lock on all four wheels is optional/standard
on Cobra models). They adjust automatically as
the brake pads or linings wear down.
Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the
*[DR11100( ALL)05/95] “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal
with a steadily increasing force. This allows the
186
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing

down, which lets you steer properly.
[DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extreme
braking can make the wheels lock and slide,
possibly decreasing your control of the steering.
If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal
and repeat the “squeeze” technique.
[DR11310( ALL)05/95] Braking with ABS brakes
[DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheels
will not lock and slide when you press down
hard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakes
automatically start releasing and reapplying the
front brakes independently and the rear brakes
together whenever your wheels start to lock. Do
not “pump” the brake pedal on vehicles
equipped with anti-lock brakes. When this
happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse.
This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but it
is normal and indicates the ABS is working as
designed.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
*[DR11650( ALL)05/95] pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase
your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor
damage may also eventually occur.
NOTE: If you are driving down a long or
*[DR11700( ALL)09/95] steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do
not apply your brakes continuously. If
you apply your brakes continuously,
they may overheat and become less
effective.
Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate
%
*[DR11800( ALL)10/95] stops does not affect the function of the brake
system and is normal. However, if the squeal
becomes louder or more frequent, have your
brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
187
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
[DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found any

detrimental effects of popular mobile radio
transmitting equipment installed on vehicles
with the anti-lock brake system, if the equipment
is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. However, if mobile radio
transmitting equipment is installed in your
vehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake system
cycles or the check anti-lock light comes on at
any time other than right after you turn the key
to ON or during a sudden stop, have your
mobile radio dealer inspect the installation.
%
*[DR12000( ALL)03/95] Parking Brake
The parking brake should be used whenever
*[DR12050( ALL)01/95] you park your vehicle.
[DR12100(M )01/89] The brake handle is located between the front
seats.
[DR12600(M )03/95] To set the parking brake after parking your
vehicle, apply the brake pedal with your right
foot and pull up on the parking brake handle.
The brake system warning light will glow.
[DR13100(M )08/93]
The parking brake
188
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
*[DR13700(M )03/95] RWARNING

When parking, do not use the gearshift in
place of the parking brake. Turn the key
to LOCK whenever you leave your
vehicle. Always set the parking brake
fully and make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual
transmission). Never leave your vehicle
unattended while it is running. If you do
not take these precautions, your vehicle
may move unexpectedly and injure
someone.
[DR13900(M )10/95] To release the parking brake, pull the handle

upward, push in the button, then lower the
handle. The Brake System warning light will
glow if the parking brake is not fully released
when the engine is running.
Always check the Brake Warning Light each
*[DR14200( ALL)03/95] time you start your engine. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.

If the parking brake is fully released, but
the Brake System light remains on, have
the brakes checked immediately. They
may not be working properly.
[DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for static

parking only and is not designed to stop a
moving vehicle, but you can use the parking
brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if
the normal brakes fail. However, since the
parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the
stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely
affected.
189
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
%*[DR14500( ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions

*
% [DR14600( ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving
As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and
*[DR14700( ALL)07/95] handle differently from your previous vehicle.
Use care until you become accustomed to its
various features and driving characteristics.
Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.
*[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or
combinations of these maneuvers can cause a
vehicle to behave differently than anticipated.
%
*[DR15200( ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather
Slippery roads
*
% [DR15300( ALL)01/95]
Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:
*[DR15400( ALL)03/95]
*[DR15500( ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel
unless necessary.
*[DR15600( ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR15700( ALL)02/95] ❑ Do not use speed control.
*[DR15800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
*[DR15900( ALL)03/92] ❑ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to
avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply
to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)
*[DR16000( ALL)02/93] ❑ Consider using one of the lower gears.

*[DR16100(M )05/95] RWARNING
To avoid losing control on slippery roads,
do not downshift into Low with the
automatic transmission when moving
faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not
downshift into First with the manual
transmission when moving faster than
5 mph (8 km/h).
190
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996

If your vehicle has speed control, do not
use it on slippery roads. You could lose
control of your vehicle and could injure
someone.
[DR16300(MBC )03/92] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud

or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the
spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward
and reverse gears. At the same time, press
lightly on the accelerator.

Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
[DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,

you may gain enough momentum to move out
of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. This may overheat the
engine, damage the transmission, or damage the
tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two
of rocking, call for a tow truck.
High water
%
*[DR16700( ALL)01/95]
Do not drive through flooded areas unless you
*[DR16800( ALL)01/95] are sure that the water is below the bottom of
the wheel rims.
If you must drive through high water, drive
*[DR16900( ALL)04/94] slowly. You may have limited traction or wet
brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because
your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
After you drive through the standing water,
*[DR17000( ALL)01/95] apply your brakes gently several times as your
vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the
brakes.
191
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
%*[DR17100( ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

There are limits to the amount of weight your
*[DR17200( ALL)01/95] vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of
your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers
and cargo, should never be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight
that your vehicle carries over the front axle and
rear axle should never be more than the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective
axle.
% [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on
the left front door lock facing or the door latch
post pillar.
The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect
*[DR17400( ALL)08/95] the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of
replacement tires with higher weight limits than
originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may
lower GVWR and GAWR limitations.

If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged
or you may lose control and injure
someone.
%
*[DR17503( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load
The load that you add to your vehicle must not
*[DR17506( ALL)01/95] exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Decal attached to the
left front door pillar.
To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add
*[DR17509( ALL)01/95] the weights of:
*[DR17512( ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers

192
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
*[DR17515( ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put in
your vehicle
*[DR17518( ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer

*[DR17521( ALL)01/95] ❑ the weight of any equipment that has been
added to your vehicle since it was delivered
to your dealer
If you do not know the actual weights of these
*[DR17524( ALL)01/95] items, use the following procedure to figure the
weight of a load:
1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,
*[DR17527( ALL)01/95] passengers and luggage. You might take
your vehicle to a shipping company or an
inspection station for trucks.
2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,
*[DR17530( ALL)01/95] passengers and luggage.
3. Subtract the first reading from the second to
*[DR17533( ALL)01/95] figure the total weight of the load.
After determining this load, you must also make
*[DR17536( ALL)01/95] sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus
the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,
make sure that the weight your vehicle carries
over each axle is less than the GAWR for the
respective axle.
If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo
*[DR17539( ALL)01/95] from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle
exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load
or remove cargo accordingly.

Improper distribution of your vehicle’s
load or carrying weight in excess of the
amount shown on the tire decal can cause
rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.
193
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
%*[DR17550(MBC )04/95] Trailer Towing

Your vehicle does not come from the factory
*[DR17650( ALL)01/95] fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are
available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealers.
Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on
*[DR17700( ALL)01/95] your vehicle, you must follow certain
precautions for your safety and the good of your
vehicle:
*[DR17800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Stay within the load limits for towing your
vehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in this
chapter.)
*[DR17900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your

vehicle for towing, making sure to use the
right equipment and to attach it properly.
(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)
*[DR18000( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle

while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in
this chapter.)
*[DR18100( ALL)01/95] ❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you

tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you
tow in this chapter.)
Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should
*[DR18175( ALL)01/95] be on the tongue. However, the tongue load
should never exceed 10% of the maximum
weight that your vehicle can safely tow.

Do not tow a trailer when the temporary
spare tire is being used.
[DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing

vehicle. The amount of weight that you can
safely tow depends on the optional equipment
on your vehicle. See the following chart.
194
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
% [DR18400( ALL)03/90] Trailer towing specifications

[DR18450(M )03/95]
six pica chart:0010320-C
*[DR20900( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

For your safety and for the good of your
*[DR21000( ALL)01/95] vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of
trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing
equipment is properly attached to your vehicle.
If you are not certain that you are using the
right equipment in the proper manner, see your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Do not use hitches that clamp onto your
*[DR21100( ALL)01/95] vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to
bear the load.
Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’s
*[DR21125( ALL)01/95] tires when preparing to tow (see inflation
recommendation on the tire label).
Using the hitch
%
*[DR21150( ALL)01/95]
Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because
*[DR21200(MBC )01/95] this type of hitch places the tongue load of a
trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, you
must distribute the load in your trailer so that
only 10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer
is on the tongue.
Tie down the load so that it does not shift and
*[DR21600( ALL)01/95] change the weight on the hitch. This will
prevent damage to your vehicle and make your
vehicle easier to handle.
195
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Connecting the safety chains

%
*[DR21650( ALL)01/95]
Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your
*[DR21700( ALL)01/95] vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the
hitch breaks.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains:
*[DR21800( ALL)01/95]
1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
*[DR21900( ALL)01/95] and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or
hook retainers. Never attach the safety
chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper
is not designed to bear the weight of a
trailer.
2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in
*[DR22000( ALL)01/95] the chains to allow you to turn corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions
*[DR22100( ALL)01/95] that the rental agency gives you.
Connecting the trailer’s brakes
%
*[DR22150( ALL)01/95]
Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or
*[DR22200( ALL)01/95] surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that
your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal
regulations.
[DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, provisions have been made
under the instrument panel for installation of an
electronic brake controller.

Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake
system directly to your vehicle’s brake
system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
196
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
Connecting the trailer’s lights

%
*[DR22350( ALL)01/95]
Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system
*[DR22400( ALL)01/95] wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system
wiring. To get the proper equipment for
hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local
trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to
follow their instructions carefully.
[DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring and
equipment has been installed at the factory. The
trailer feed wire (supplied in a box in the
luggage compartment) needs a connector
compatible with your trailer prior to installation.
If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you
*[DR22500( ALL)01/95] may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting
system.
%
*[DR22600( ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow
Be especially careful when driving while you
*[DR22650( ALL)05/95] tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on
hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
[DR22950(MBC )09/93] If you tow in Overdrive while riding through
hilly country, your vehicle may frequently shift
between Overdrive and Third gears. To prevent
your vehicle from shifting too much, depress the
Transmission Control Switch (TCS). This will
also give the engine more power going up hills
and better engine braking going down hills.
197
File:10rcdrm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996
[DR22955(M )05/95] If your vehicle has a manual transmission and

you are towing a trailer, you should select gear
positions which will avoid jerking or excessive
engine speed. If you need to drive excessively in
1 (First) or 2 (Second), it may indicate that the
trailer is too big or heavily loaded for your
vehicle’s drivetrain. Continuous driving in these
two gears while towing a trailer is not
recommended.
[DR22960(M )08/93] When you tow up or down steep hills, move the
manual transmission gearshift to a lower gear.
This will increase engine power on upgrades
and engine braking on downgrades.
If you use the speed control while you are
%
*[DR23000( ALL)01/95] towing on very long, steep grades, the speed
control may shut off.
*[DR23100( ALL)08/95] Servicing Your Vehicle If You Tow

If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your
*[DR23200( ALL)08/93] vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently
than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and
Record booklet for additional information.
198
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
Roadside Emergencies
%*[RE00400( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the
*[RE00450( ALL)08/95] lights on or any electrical equipment on after
you turn the engine off. If this happens, you
may be able to jump-start your vehicle with a
booster battery.
*[RE00500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explode
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit
cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.

To protect yourself when charging a
battery, always shield your face and eyes.
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.
%
Applying too much pressure on the ends
when lifting a battery could cause acid to
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or
with your hands on the opposite corners.
%
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns
skin, eyes, and clothing.
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or

*[RE00900( ALL)07/95] clothing, immediately flush the area with water
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the
199
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water

first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.
To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,
*[RE01000( ALL)03/95] and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these
directions for preparing your vehicle to
jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in
the order they are given. If in doubt, call for
road service.
*[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

[RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery.
1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so
*[RE01200( ALL)03/95] you need to use a 12-volt jumper system.
You will damage your starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical parts if
you connect them to a 24-volt power supply
(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt generator set).
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled
*[RE01300( ALL)03/95] vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s
electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
*[RE01400( ALL)04/95] the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles
do not touch each other. Set the parking
brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any
*[RE01500( ALL)03/95] excessive corrosion before you attach the
jumper cables.
5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.
*[RE01600( ALL)02/95] Turning on the fan helps protect the
electrical system from voltage surges. Turn
off all other switches and lights in both
vehicles to prevent possible damage to either
vehicle’s electrical systems.
200
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
Connecting the jumper cables

%
*[RE01700( ALL)05/95]
1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to
*[RE01800( ALL)03/95] the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery. (You can connect either jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you
use the same cable for both positive
terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red
cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and
the black for the negative ones.
2. Connect the other end of the first cable to
*[RE01900( ALL)04/95] the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery.
3. Connect one end of the second cable to the
*[RE02000( ALL)07/95] negative (S) terminal of the booster battery
— NOT to the discharged battery.
[RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a
good metallic surface on the engine or frame
of the disabled vehicle making sure it is
clear of any rotating engine components. The
following illustrations show where you can
find a metallic surface.

Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (S) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause
an explosion of the gases that surround
the battery.
201
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE02300(M )10/95]
full page art:0010332-E
The 3.8L SFI engine
202
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE02650(MBC )05/95]
full page art:0010666-G
The 4.6L SFI Engine
203
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
*[RE02900( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in
*[RE03000( ALL)03/95] the way of moving engine parts, then start
the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a
moderate speed.
2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few
*[RE03100( ALL)03/95] minutes and then start the disabled vehicle.
It may take a couple of tries before the
vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start
after several attempts, there may be a
different problem.
3. When both vehicles are running, let them
*[RE03200( ALL)03/95] idle for a few minutes to charge the
discharged battery.
Removing jumper cables
%
*[RE03300( ALL)03/95]
1. Always remove the jumper cables in the
*[RE03400( ALL)03/95] reverse order. Remove the negative (S) end
of the jumper cable from the metallic surface
on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
2. Remove the negative (S) cable from the
*[RE03500( ALL)06/95] booster battery.
3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the
*[RE03600( ALL)06/95] booster battery.
4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)
*[RE03700( ALL)05/95] cable from the discharged battery.
After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while
*[RE03800( ALL)04/95] to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.
Drive it around for a while with all electrical
accessories turned off to let the battery recharge.
You may need to use a battery charger to fully
recharge the battery.
204
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE03810(M )09/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.8L

engine you will need to perform
additional steps after your vehicle has
been jump started. See Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance Testing in
Servicing Your Vehicle Chapter.
%*[RE03900( ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire
If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do
*[RE04000( ALL)01/95] not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off
the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on
the hazard flashers.
%
*[RE04100( ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire
[RE04225(MBC )03/94] You have a high pressure temporary spare tire.
This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and
is designed for emergency use only. Use it only
when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon
as you can. This spare tire is marked with the
words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you
can easily identify it.
NOTE: Extended use of other than
*[RE04250( ALL)01/95] conventional spare tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness.
This loss of effectiveness does not
affect normal driving and should not
be noticeable to the driver.

If you use the temporary spare tire
continuously or do not follow these
precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly
injuring yourself or others.
205
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
When you drive with the temporary spare tire,

*[RE04400( ALL)01/95] DO NOT:
*[RE04500( ALL)01/95] ❑ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any

circumstances.
*[RE04600( ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than

the maximum vehicle load rating listed on
the tire decal.
*[RE04700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[RE04800( ALL)01/95] ❑ use tire chains on this tire.
*[RE04900( ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire or
remove it from its wheel.
*[RE05000( ALL)01/95] ❑ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.
*[RE05100( ALL)01/95] ❑ drive through an automatic car wash with
this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is
smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces
the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get
caught in the rails and it could be damaged.
%
*[RE05500( ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location
[RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk.
206
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE05800(M )11/93]
The spare tire location
To remove the spare tire:

%
*[RE06500( ALL)02/95]
[RE06520(M )06/93] 1. Remove the optional cargo net and storage
bag.
[RE06530(M )05/90] 2. Remove the spare tire cover.
[RE06540(M )05/90] 3. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down the
spare tire.
4. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
*[RE06560(M )01/89]
*
% [RE07300( ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire
[RE07500(M )03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move
or roll. If you have an automatic
transmission, put the gearshift in P (Park). If
you have a manual transmission, put the
gearshift in 1 (First). Set the parking brake
and block the wheel that is diagonally
opposite the tire that you are changing.
207
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
When one of the back wheels is off the ground,

*[RE07535(M )05/95] the transmission alone will not prevent the
vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,
even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To
prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set,
then block the wheel (both directions) that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire that is being changed.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.

To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
2. Get out the spare tire and jack.
*[RE07900( ALL)03/95]
[RE08010(M )03/95] 3. Remove wheel covers with the tapered end
of a wheel nut wrench. Insert the handle of
the wrench and twist it against the inner
wheel cover flange. To remove aluminum
wheel center ornaments, insert the curled
end of lug wrench into pry-off notch and
pry against the wheel. To avoid damage to
aluminum wheel, do not twist wrench. For
more about removing wheel covers, see the
information later in this section.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
*[RE08100(MBC )09/95] counterclockwise, but do not remove them
until the tire is raised off the ground. You
should pull up on the handle rather than
push to develop maximum force to loosen
wheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel Lug
Nuts later in this chapter for information on
removing anti-theft lug nuts.
208
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
%
*[RE08150( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire
1. Find the jack notch next to the door of the
*
% [RE08200(M )11/94]
tire that you are changing. Put the jack in
the jack notch and turn the handle of the
jack clockwise until the wheel is completely
off the ground.

To lessen the risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is on the
jack. The jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
% [RE08500(M )03/93]
The notches for the jack
209
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE08550( ALL)10/92]
The improper lift point
[RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as a

lift point.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the
*[RE08900( ALL)01/95] wheel clears the ground. Remove the wheel
lug nuts.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
*[RE08920( ALL)01/95] making sure that the air valve stem is facing
outward.
4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the
*[RE08940( ALL)03/95] wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled
edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the
vehicle. If you do, you could force the
vehicle off the jack.
5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
*[RE08960( ALL)01/95] counterclockwise.
210
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug

*[RE08980( ALL)01/95] nuts in the order shown in the following
illustration. As soon as possible, have your
dealer or a qualified service technician check
the lug nuts for proper torque specifications.
% [RE09100( ALL)03/93]
The lug nuts on the wheel
7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the

*[RE09400( ALL)01/95] trunk.
8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make
*[RE09500( ALL)03/95] sure the jack is securely fastened so it does
not rattle when you drive.
9. Unblock the wheels.
*[RE09600( ALL)06/95]
% [RE10600(MBC )12/94] Aluminum Road Wheel Ornaments
(If equipped)
[RE10700(MBC )03/93] To remove the ornament, stick the tapered end
of the jack handle between the ornament and
wheel and pry off the ornament.
[RE10800(MBC )03/93] To replace the ornament, stick one side of the
ornament into the center of the wheel and strike
the other side with the palm of your hand.
[RE11838(M GV)03/93] Remove the wheelcover from the wheel using
the flanged end of the wheel nut wrench by
inserting the handle and then prying against the
inner wheelcover flange.
[RE11842(M GV)10/95] Install the wheelcover on the wheel with the
valve stem in the wheel matching the hole in the
wheelcover. Push by hand on the outside edges
211
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
of the wheelcover until it is snapped firmly in

place on the wheel.
%
*[RE12700(MBC )03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)
[RE12801(M )10/95] The aluminum wheels on Mustang 4.6L engine
vehicles are secured with locking lug nuts. One
of the lug nuts on each wheel must be removed
and installed with a special key. The key and a
registration card are attached to the lug wrench
and stored with the spare tire. If you lose the
key, send the registration card to the
manufacturer (not to the dealer) to get a
replacement key.
NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut key
*[RE12850(MBC )03/95] assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer who has
access to a master set of keys.
NOTE: DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACT
*[RE12875(MBC )09/95] WRENCH ON THE LUG NUT KEY.
[RE13000(MBC )03/95]
The anti-theft lug nut and key
Removing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13100(MBC )03/95]
Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make
*[RE13300(MBC )03/95] sure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.
If you hold the key on an angle, you may
damage the key and the lug nut.
Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key
*[RE13400(MBC )03/95] and apply pressure on the key with the wrench.
Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction
to remove the lug nut.
212
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
Reinstalling the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13500(MBC )09/95]
Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the
*[RE13600(MBC )03/95] lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, while
applying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.
*[RE13800( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does

Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
[RE13810( ALL)07/95] The Fuel System Shut-off Switch
[RE13900( ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you
have had a collision, the fuel system shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device that stops the fuel system
when your vehicle has been involved in a
substantial jolt.
[RE14000( ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset the
fuel system shut-off switch, see Fuel system
shut-off switch in the Index.
%*[RE14100( ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle
[RE14225(M )10/95] Mustang/Mustang GT
[RE14250(M )10/95] It is recommended that your vehicle be towed
with wheel lift or flatbed equipment. If slingbelt
equipment must be used, the towbar will deform
the soft fascia (bumper). However, it will return
to an acceptable shape.
[RE14255(M )10/95] Mustang Cobra/Convertible
[RE14260(M )10/95] DO NOT TOW WITH SLINGBELT
EQUIPMENT. Ford Motor Company has not
developed or approved a T-hook sling-type
procedure. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear
using wheel lift equipment, the front wheels
must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to
the front fascia (bumper).
213
File:12rcrem.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996
[RE14350(M )10/95]
three fourths page art:0011387-A
When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator

*[RE14400( ALL)03/95] what kind of vehicle you have. A towing
manual is available from Ford Motor Company
for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for
the proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
214
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
Customer Assistance
%*[HS00205( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,
*[HS00210( ALL)08/95] seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators
who put you in touch with the help you need if
you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you
throughout your warranty period of 3 years or
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.
To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages
beyond this period (available through Ford Auto
Club in the United States or Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact
your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
*[HS00215( ALL)06/94]
*[HS00220( ALL)06/94] ❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
*[HS00225( ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
*[HS00230( ALL)06/94] ❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
*[HS00235( ALL)06/94] ❑ Bring you fuel if you run out.
*[HS00240( ALL)06/94] ❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents or
getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered
(some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing and repossession).
*[HS00245( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

Your Roadside Assistance identification card can
*[HS00250( ALL)06/94] be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your
glove compartment. Complete the card and place
it in your wallet for quick reference.
215
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
To receive roadside assistance in the United

*[HS00255( ALL)04/95] States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call
1-800-665-2006).
Should you need to arrange for roadside
*[HS00260( ALL)04/95] assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain
information about reimbursement call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00300( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and
*[HS00400( ALL)01/95] Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service
your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how
to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
%
*[HS00500( ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or
Canada)
Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your
*[HS00600( ALL)04/95] selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. You may, however, take
your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your
dealer will be able to resolve your concern.
If you are not satisfied with the service you
*[HS00700( ALL)04/95] received from your dealership’s service
department, talk to the service manager at the
dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to
the owner or general manager of the dealership.
In most cases, you will have your concern
resolved at this level.
If you are away from home when your vehicle
*[HS01000( ALL)03/95] needs to be serviced, or if you need more help
than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford
Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help.
216
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
In the U.S., contact:

*[HS01025( ALL)04/95]
*
% [HS01050( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060100-E
If you live in Canada and have any questions or

*[HS01100( ALL)03/95] concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
%
*[HS01150( ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
Please have the following information available

*[HS01200( ALL)04/95] when contacting Ford Customer Assistance:
*[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and

home)
*[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the
dealership is located
*[HS01500( ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550( ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased
*[HS01600( ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle
*
% [HS01700( ALL)09/95] ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
listed on your owner card and/or your
vehicle ownership license
217
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
[HS01800( ALL)05/95]
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)
If you still have a service or product complaint,

*[HS02200( ALL)03/95] you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement
Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.
%*[HS02300( ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board
(U.S. Only)
The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,
*[HS02400( ALL)03/95] independent dispute-settlement program
available free to owners or lessees of qualifying
Ford Motor Company vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be
*[HS02500( ALL)01/95] available in all states. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or to
discontinue this process at any time without
notice and without incurring obligations.
*[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board

Review?
The Board reviews unresolved warranty
*[HS02700( ALL)08/95] performance complaints on Ford, Mercury and
Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks
under warranty that have not been resolved by a
dealer or Ford Motor Company.
The Board does not review issues involving:
*[HS02750( ALL)03/95]
*[HS02800( ALL)01/95] ❑ A non-Ford product
*[HS02900( ALL)01/95] ❑ A non-Ford dealership
218
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
*[HS03100( ALL)01/95] ❑ A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200( ALL)01/95] ❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential
expenses unless incidental to a service or
product complaint being reviewed
*[HS03300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400( ALL)01/95] ❑ Alleged liability claims
*[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑ Property damage where such damage is
significant when compared to the economic
loss alleged under the warranty dispute
*[HS03500( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal,
family, or household purposes
NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on
*[HS03650( ALL)01/95] which applicable express written new
vehicle warranties have expired at
receipt of your application are not
eligible. Eligibility may differ
according to state law. For example, see
the unique brochure for California
purchasers/lessees.
*[HS03700( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

The Board has four members:
*[HS03800( ALL)04/95]
*[HS03900( ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives
*[HS04000( ALL)04/95] ❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer
Consumer candidates for Board membership are
*[HS04200( ALL)04/95] recruited and trained by an independent
consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of
their business leadership qualities.
If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and
*[HS04300( ALL)04/95] 36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty
start date), you have a right to make an oral
presentation before the Board by indicating your
choice on the application. Also, oral
219
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
presentations may be requested by the Board. A

decision is made by the Board by simple
majority vote.
Board members review all the materials related
*[HS04320( ALL)04/95] to each complaint and, based on the available
information, arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Decisions are based on the written
statements and any oral presentations made by
each of the involved parties.
Because the Board usually meets only once a
*[HS04400( ALL)04/95] month, some cases will take longer than 30 days
to be reviewed. The Board will make every
effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it
receives the customer application form.
After your case has been reviewed, the Board
*[HS04500( ALL)04/95] will mail you its decision in writing. It will also
provide you with a form to indicate your
acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The
decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer
and Ford, but customers may have other options
available to them under state or federal law.
The decisions of the Board, however, may be
*[HS04600( ALL)04/95] introduced into evidence by any party in
subsequent legal proceedings that may be
initiated.
*[HS04700( ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

Write to the Board at the following address to
*[HS04800( ALL)04/95] request a brochure/application. You will be sent
a brochure and a one-page customer application
form. The form should be completed and mailed
to the same address.
220
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
*[HS04900( ALL)02/93]
*[HS05100( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

Your application will be reviewed and if it is
*[HS05200( ALL)04/95] determined to be eligible, you will receive an
acknowledgment indicating the file number
assigned to your application and the local Board
address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford
Motor Company representative are asked to
submit statements.
To review your case properly, the Board needs
*[HS05300( ALL)04/95] the following information:
*[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents and

maintenance or repair orders that relate to
the case
*[HS05500( ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle

identification number (VIN)
*[HS05600( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time
of repair
*[HS05800( ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the
vehicle or who serviced your vehicle
*[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief description of your unresolved

complaint
*[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken

with the dealer and Ford Motor Company
221
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
*[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people you

contacted at the dealership
*[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑ a description of the action you want done to

resolve your concern.
Should your application NOT qualify for review,
*[HS06305( ALL)07/95] an explanation will be mailed to you.
%*[HS07400( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Only)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
*[HS07500( ALL)01/95] which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor
Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
*[HS07600( ALL)01/95] open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
*[HS07700( ALL)01/95] Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or
366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
222
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
% *[HS08700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance
*[HS08800( ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
If you live in Canada and have any questions or
*[HS08900( ALL)03/95] concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
*[HS09000( ALL)03/95]
%
*[HS09100( ALL)09/95] Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)
In those cases where you continue to feel that
*[HS09200( ALL)09/95] the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a
factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an
impartial third party mediation/arbitration
program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and
*[HS09300( ALL)10/95] relatively speedy alternative to resolve a
disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without
cost to you and is designed to eliminate the
need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
*[HS09400( ALL)09/95] Arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
enviroment. These impartial Arbitrators review
the positions of the parties, make decisions and,
where appropriate, render awards to resolve
223
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair and

final as the Arbitrator’s award is binding on
both you and Ford of Cananda.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories
*[HS09500( ALL)09/95] and provinces, except Quebec. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly
at 1-800-207-0685.
%*[HS09700( ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.
and Canada
Before you export your vehicle to a foreign
*[HS09800( ALL)06/95] country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy
or consulate to make sure local regulations do
not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide
whether you should import your vehicle to that
country.
Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you
*[HS09900( ALL)06/95] where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get
unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an
anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or owner relations office
before you leave the U.S. or Canada.
Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a
*[HS10000( ALL)06/95] proper conversion may damage the effectiveness
of your emissions control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
damage that is caused by use of improper fuel.
You may also have difficulty importing your
*[HS10100( ALL)06/95] vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
224
File:13rchsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are

*[HS10200( ALL)06/95] traveling or living in Central or South America,
the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, write to:
*[HS10300( ALL)06/95]
If you are in other foreign countries, contact the

*[HS10400( ALL)06/95] nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, they can direct you to the appropriate
Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
*[HS10500( ALL)06/95] then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,
register your Vehicle Identification Number and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations.
225
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
Accessories
*[AC00200( ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

Ford has many fine products available from
*[AC00240( ALL)04/95] your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its
finishes. For best results, use the following, or
products of equivalent quality:
*[AC00280( ALL)05/95]
twelve pica chart:0001433-A
A wide selection of accessories is available

*[AC00300( ALL)04/95] through your local authorized dealer. These fine
accessories have been engineered specifically to
fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom
designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built
vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from
high quality materials and meets or exceeds
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.
That is why Ford brand accessories are
warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your
dealer for complete warranty information and
accessory availability.
227
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
*[AC00350( ALL)06/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00400(M )03/95]
sixteen pica chart:0010548-P
[AC00500(M )03/95]
eighteen pica chart:0010549-J
228
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
[AC00910(M )05/94] NOTE: Use only hook and pad design roof
racks. Follow all manufacturers
recommendations including vehicle
speed, rack loads and tie down
procedures. Also, DO NOT over torque
the hook clamp, as vehicle damage
may occur.
NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,
*[AC01400( ALL)01/95] passengers, and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label). Consult your dealer for specific
weight information.
[AC01500( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) or in Canada the
Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulates the use
of mobile communications systems —
such as two-way radios, telephones,
and theft alarms — that are equipped
with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with FCC regulation
and should be installed only by a
qualified technician.
229
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
NOTE: Mobile communications systems may

*[AC01600( ALL)01/95] harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use or are not
properly installed. For example, when
operated, such systems may cause the
engine to stumble or stall. In addition,
such systems may themselves be
damaged or their operation affected by
operating your vehicle. (Citizens band
[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,
and other transmitters whose power
output is 5 watts or less will not
ordinarily affect your vehicle’s
operation.)
NOTE: Because we have no control over the
*[AC01700( ALL)05/95] installation, design, or manufacture of
such systems, Ford cannot assume
responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage that may result if you use this
equipment.
230
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
% [AC01800(M )12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011320-A
232
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
[AC01900(M )12/94]
233
File:14rcacm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996
[AC02000(M )12/94]
234
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Servicing Your Mustang
%*[SV00300( ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
*[SV00400( ALL)01/95]
1. When we can, we design parts that do not
*[SV00550( ALL)01/95] need to be serviced.
2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as
*[SV00600( ALL)01/95] easy as possible. To help you:
*[SV00700( ALL)01/95] ❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in

the engine compartment so that you can find
them easily.
*[SV00800( ALL)01/95] ❑ When possible, we design parts — such as

the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced
without tools.
*[SV00900( ALL)05/94] ❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that

makes tracking routine service for your
vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is
located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
This chapter tells you about the basic parts that
*[SV01000( ALL)01/95] you need to check and service regularly.
If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your
*[SV01100( ALL)02/95] dealership can provide the parts and service
required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this
Owner Guide.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
*[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be
performed for the proper operation of your
235
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in

the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any
unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that
your vehicle may need service. If you do notice
something unusual, see that your vehicle is
serviced promptly.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,
*[SV01275( ALL)03/95] and service parts conforming to Ford
specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and
built to provide the best performance in your
vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is
your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in
your vehicle.
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
%
*[SV01400( ALL)09/95] fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
% *[SV01600( ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle
Be especially careful when inspecting or
*[SV01700( ALL)06/95] servicing your vehicle. Here are some general
precautions for your safety:
%
*[SV01800(MBC )10/95] ❑ Do not work on a hot engine. The engine
cooling fan may come on unexpectedly.
Always turn the engine off and let it cool.
*[SV01850(MBC )10/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
236
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV01900( ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,

avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that
could get caught in moving parts. Take
appropriate precautions with long hair.
*[SV02000( ALL)06/95] ❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed

space with the engine running, unless you are
sure you have enough ventilation.
*[SV02100( ALL)08/95] ❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If you must work
under a vehicle, use safety stands.
*[SV02200( ALL)06/95] ❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking

materials away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must
*[SV02600(MBC )03/95] “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle
will drive properly. To find out how the engine
does this, see Battery in this chapter.
Working with the engine off:
*[SV02800( ALL)03/95]
[SV02900(M )03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully, block the wheels,
and make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
2. Remove the key from the ignition after you
*[SV03100( ALL)06/95] turn the engine off.
3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
*[SV03150( ALL)06/95] vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on:
*[SV03200( ALL)03/95]
[SV03300(M )03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully, and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or Neutral
(manual transmission).
2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
*[SV03501( ALL)03/95] vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
237
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
%
*[SV03650( ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood
[SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
located under the lower left corner of the
instrument panel.
[SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, and
release the auxiliary catch that is located
under the front edge of the hood at the
center of the vehicle.
[SV04085(M )05/95]
The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood
[SV04100(M )01/89] 3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop
rod using only the hole marked “PROP”.
[SV04300(M )01/89] Whenever you close the hood, make sure the
prop rod is secured in its retainer and that the
hood latches securely.
NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at
*[SV04450( ALL)01/95] six-month intervals to maintain smooth
and trouble-free operation.
238
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%*[SV04600( ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment

Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:
*[SV04700(MBC )09/93]
[SV04900(MBC )06/95] ❑ a 3.8 liter SFI engine
[SV05075(MBC )03/95] ❑ a 4.6 liter SFI engine
The following pages show diagrams of each
*[SV05300(MBC )11/94] engine type and where to find items that you
should regularly service.
239
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV05400(M )10/95]
full page art:0010325-D
A 3.8 Liter SFI engine
240
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV05500(M )05/95]
A 4.6 Liter (2V) engine — GT models
241
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV05850( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine
A clean engine is more efficient because a
*[SV06000( ALL)04/95] buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,
keeping the engine warmer than usual.
*[SV06020( ALL)07/95] ❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer

is used to clean the engine. The high pressure
fluid could penetrate sealed parts and
assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
*[SV06040( ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the

engine block or fuel injection pump, do not
spray a hot engine or injection pump with
cold water.
*[SV06060( ALL)07/95] ❑ The alternator, distributor and air intake must

be covered. Covering these components will
help prevent water damage.
*[SV06080( ALL)04/95] ❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is

running. Water getting into the engine may
cause internal damage.
%*[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank
The fuel door is outside the car on the passenger
*[SV06240(MBC )05/95] side near the back. To fill the fuel tank:
1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove
*[SV06550( ALL)05/95] the cap carefully and slowly by turning it
counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If
the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound while disengaging
the fuel cap, wait until it stops before
completely removing the cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or
others.
242
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel

*[SV06700( ALL)05/95] filler pipe before pumping the fuel.
NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of
*[SV06800( ALL)09/95] your vehicle, clean it off immediately.
The fuel may dull or soften the paint
if you do not wash it off.
3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you
%
*[SV06850( ALL)08/95] are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until
it is tight. It will click when it is fully
tightened.
4. Push the fuel door closed.
*[SV06875( ALL)10/95]
[SV06900( ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with a
Motorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If you
do not use the proper fuel cap, the
pressure in the fuel tank can damage the
fuel system or cause it to work improperly
in a collision, endangering you and your
passengers.
NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an
*[SV06950( ALL)09/95] aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer
warranty may be void for any damage
to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.
%
*[SV07500( ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.
*[SV07600( ALL)06/95] Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.
Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is
damaged because you used the wrong fuel.
Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle
*[SV07701( ALL)05/95] more responsive and maintain its good fuel
economy and emissions. It should not be
necessary to add any aftermarket products to
your fuel tank if you continue to use a
high-quality fuel.
243
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Octane recommendations
%
*[SV08750( ALL)08/95]
Your engine is designed to use fuel with an
*[SV08800( ALL)05/95] octane rating of 87. In most cases it is not
necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating
higher than 87. At service stations, the octane
rating is displayed in a label on the pumps.
[SV08900( ALL)05/95]
Using a fuel with a lower octane rating can

*[SV09100( ALL)08/95] cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can
damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes
*[SV09200( ALL)05/95] knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when
you accelerate. However, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician if persistent heavy
knocking occurs because this can damage the
engine.
If your vehicle has problems with starting, rough
*[SV09350( ALL)05/95] idle or hesitation problems when the engine is
cold, it may be caused by fuel with low
volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the
condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
Gasolines for clean air
%
*[SV09800( ALL)04/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required
*[SV09900( ALL)06/95] to contain oxygenates to improve air quality.
Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol
(blended at no more than 10%), methanol or
wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with
cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl
tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than
15%).
244
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain

*[SV09950( ALL)02/95] areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to
further reduce emissions from your vehicle.
Generally, you should not experience difficulties
*[SV10000( ALL)06/95] operating your vehicle on fuels containing
oxygenates. We encourage you to use these
fuels.
%
*[SV10185( ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive
Fuels
[SV10195( ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury
or death if misused or mishandled. To
minimize the risk that you will be
injured, please read the following
information carefully and observe the
recommended precautions.
*[SV10197( ALL)07/95] ❑ Turn vehicle off when refueling

*[SV10199( ALL)07/95] ❑ Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are
extremely flammable.
*[SV10201( ALL)07/95] ❑ Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.

Gasoline or gasoline blended with
methanol can cause blindness and
possible death when swallowed. If any
fuel is swallowed, call a physician or
poison control center immediately.
*[SV10209( ALL)07/95] ❑ Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

*[SV10211( ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with
soap and water.
*[SV10225( ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact

lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15
minutes, and seek medical attention.
245
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small

*[SV10227( ALL)08/95] amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.
Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors
has caused cancer in laboratory animals.
If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or
*[SV10230( ALL)08/95] other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of
alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a
gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same
kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic
beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness could result. Consult
a physician promptly if you experience an
adverse reaction.
%
*[SV11300( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel
NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this
*[SV11350( ALL)09/95] situation may have an adverse effect on
modern powertrain components.
You may need to crank the engine several times
*[SV11500( ALL)07/95] before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from
the tank to the engine.
[SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy
Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of
*[SV11700( ALL)05/95] your vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles Per
Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers
(L/100K).
Do not calculate fuel economy during your
*[SV11750( ALL)05/95] vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an
accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle
will normally use.
To calculate fuel economy:
*[SV11800( ALL)05/95]
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the
*[SV11900( ALL)05/95] initial odometer reading.
2. Every time you buy fuel, record the
*[SV12000( ALL)05/95] amount (in gallons or liters) purchased.
246
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tank

*[SV12100( ALL)05/95] and record the final odometer reading.
4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel
*[SV12200( ALL)10/95] economy:
*[SV12250( ALL)10/95] ❑ English: MPG = (total miles driven) V

(gallons used)
*[SV12275( ALL)10/95] ❑ Metric: L/100k = (liters used) V

(100 kilometers)
*[SV12300( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates

EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from
*[SV12400( ALL)05/95] laboratory tests under simulated road conditions
and may not reflect the actual conditions you
experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that
you will achieve the fuel economy shown.
The following decrease fuel economy:
*[SV12650( ALL)05/95]
*[SV12700( ALL)05/95] ❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
*[SV12800( ALL)05/95] ❑ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
*[SV12850( ALL)05/95] ❑ Driving with your foot on the brake
*[SV12900( ALL)05/95] ❑ Sudden stops
*[SV12950( ALL)05/95] ❑ Extended engine idling
*[SV13000( ALL)05/95] ❑ Using speed control in hilly terrain
*[SV13100( ALL)05/95] ❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear
window defroster and other accessories
*[SV13200( ALL)05/95] ❑ Underinflated tires

*[SV13300( ALL)05/95] ❑ Heavy loads
*[SV13400( ALL)05/95] ❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or
luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.
247
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV13510( ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers

If you choose to do your own fueling, you
*[SV13520( ALL)01/95] should also perform a few simple maintenance
routines. This extra effort will save you
additional money and contribute to the driving
efficiency of your vehicle.
The following procedures require only a tire
*[SV13530( ALL)01/95] gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield
washer fluid.
*[SV13540( ALL)01/95] ❑ Check the engine oil at every refueling stop

*[SV13550( ALL)01/95] ❑ Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and
headlights
*[SV13560( ALL)01/95] ❑ Check windshield washer fluid

*[SV13570( ALL)02/95] ❑ Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges
*[SV13580( ALL)01/95] ❑ Check the tire pressure at least monthly
%*[SV13600( ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations
We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an
*[SV13610( ALL)09/95] equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the American
Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on
the front of the container.
*[SV13650( ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0060021-E
The API Certification Mark
248
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Never use:
*[SV13670( ALL)01/95]
*[SV13680( ALL)01/95] ❑ “Non-Detergent” oils
*[SV13690( ALL)04/95] ❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
*
% [SV13700( ALL)01/95] ❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments
or engine treatments
Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are
%
*[SV13702( ALL)03/95] PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the
best engine performance, fuel economy and
engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and
%
*[SV13703( ALL)03/95] of the preferred viscosity may be used in your
engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be
changed according to the maintenance schedule.
%
*[SV13775( ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil
Since the proper amount of engine oil is
*[SV13800( ALL)03/95] important for safe engine operation, check the oil
using the dipstick each time you put fuel in
your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
parked on level ground.
Checking the engine oil level:
%
*[SV13900( ALL)04/95]
1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up
*[SV14000( ALL)02/95] and allow a few minutes for the engine oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
2. Set the parking brake, making sure that the
*[SV14050(M )03/95] gearshift is securely latched in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual
transmission).
3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine
*[SV14100( ALL)02/95] heat.
4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in
*[SV14200( ALL)03/95] yellow) and carefully pull it out of the
engine.
249
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into

*[SV14300( ALL)01/95] position, making sure it is fully seated.
[SV14355(M )10/95]
Engine oil dipstick — 4.6 liter engines
[SV14450(MBC )03/95]
Engine oil dipstick — 3.8 liter engines
6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the

*[SV14500( ALL)10/95] oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line (3.8L)
or at the “MIN” mark (4.6L), add engine oil
as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the
letter “F” in Full (3.8L) or “MAX” (4.6L)
mark, engine damage or high oil
consumption may occur and some oil must
be removed from the engine.
7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is
*[SV14600( ALL)01/95] fully seated.
250
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
It may be necessary to add some oil between oil

*[SV14800( ALL)01/95] changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED
engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your
vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if
engine damage is caused by the use of improper
engine oil.
Add engine oil through the oil filler cap
*[SV15000( ALL)03/95] highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the
filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the
opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.
Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.
%
*[SV16300( ALL)06/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter
Change the engine oil and oil filter per the
*[SV16400( ALL)04/95] following, whichever occurs first.
*[SV16500( ALL)04/95]
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record

*[SV16800( ALL)06/95] booklet for additional information.
%
251
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996

Continuous contact with USED motor oil
has caused cancer in laboratory mice.
Protect your skin by washing with soap and
*[SV17285( ALL)07/95] water.
%*[SV17300( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant
*
% [SV17400( ALL)09/95] Checking the Engine Coolant
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
*[SV17500( ALL)09/95] Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
*[SV17550(M )10/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from
%
*[SV17800( ALL)05/94] overheating in the summer and from freezing in
the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least
once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant
reservoir located in the engine compartment. To
locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your
vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this
chapter.
The coolant additives also protect the entire
*[SV17850( ALL)05/95] cooling system from internal passageway
corrosion and these additives lubricate the water
pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted
in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
252
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV17900(M )05/95]
The engine coolant recovery reservoir — 3.8L
[SV18100(M )10/95]
The engine coolant recovery reservoir — 4.6L engines
253
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV18600( ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses
Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and
*[SV18700( ALL)11/94] hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and
loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace
with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.
*[SV18800( ALL)09/95] Adding Engine Coolant

Do not put engine coolant in the container
for the windshield washer fluid.
If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or
*[SV18950( ALL)09/95] antifreeze could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
[SV19000(MBC )05/95]
RWARNING
Never remove the radiator cap or vent
plug while the engine is running or hot.
[SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury that

can be caused by escaping steam or engine
coolant.
[SV19040(MBC )03/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine
off and let it cool. Even when the engine is
cool, be careful when you remove the
radiator cap or vent plug.
[SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towel
around the cap and turn it slowly
counterclockwise to unscrew.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
*[SV19150( ALL)09/95]
[SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has
been released, use the cloth to press the cap
down, turn it, and remove it.
254
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot

*[SV19170(MBC )09/95] steam may blow out or hot engine coolant
may even splash out.
To find out how much engine coolant mixture
*[SV19190( ALL)09/95] your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill
capacities for fluids in the Index.
% [SV19200( ALL)06/95] Add engine coolant only to the reservoir. If the
coolant level is low, add a 50/50 or appropriate
mixture of water and the type of engine coolant
that Ford specifies. You may add water by itself
only in an emergency, but you should replace it
with a 50/50 or appropriate mixture as soon as
possible.
Have your dealer check the engine cooling
*[SV19300( ALL)01/95] system for leaks if you have to add more than a
quart (liter) of engine coolant more than once a
month.
Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an
*[SV19350( ALL)09/95] optimized formula that will protect all metals
and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for
four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not
necessary and not recommended to use
supplemental coolant additives in your gasoline
powered vehicle. These additives may harm
your engine cooling system. Follow the
recommended service interval for changing your
engine coolant.
NOTE: When you change or add engine
*[SV19450( ALL)09/95] coolant, it is important to maintain
your engine coolant concentration
between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%
(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local
climate conditions. Below 40% you will
lose freeze protection and above 60%
your engine may overheat on a warm
day.
255
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV19460( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may

void your warranty for the engine
cooling system. Use only a premium
nationally recognized brand name
engine coolant. Do not use alcohol,
methanol antifreeze or engine coolant
mixed with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze. If you do not use the proper
coolant, the aluminum radiator on your
vehicle will corrode.
Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the
*[SV19470( ALL)09/95] Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process
and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled
engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine
coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet
Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.
%
Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid
*[SV19500( ALL)09/95] E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)
or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford
Specification ESE-M97B44-A.
Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make sure
*[SV19550( ALL)09/95] that the coolant will not freeze at the
temperature level in which you drive during
winter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolant
in your engine that has a protection rating of at
least -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection rating
is appropriate for the climate in which you live.
256
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV20100( ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush
Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain
*[SV20200( ALL)11/94] and flush of the cooling system can be found in
the Car Service Manual. Following these
recommended procedures will ensure that the
specified coolant level and a 50/50 or
appropriate mixture of coolant and water is
maintained.
*[SV20300( ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Refill Procedure

When the entire cooling system is drained and
*[SV20400( ALL)01/95] refilled, the following procedure should be used
to ensure a complete fill:
NOTE: It is imperative the following
*[SV20450( ALL)05/95] procedure be adhered to. Failure to do
so could result in damage to your
engine.
[SV20500(MBC )03/95] 3.8L engine only
[SV20601(MBC )03/94] ❑ Open the vent plug.
[SV20700(MBC )03/93] ❑ Remove coolant recovery reservoir cap.
[SV20801(MBC )03/93] ❑ Remove radiator pressure cap.
[SV20900(MBC )05/94] ❑ With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50
mixture of recommended cooling system fluid
and water to the radiator until full, then add
to the reservoir until the reservoir is at the
FULL-HOT level.
[SV21000(MBC )12/91] ❑ Close the vent plug.
[SV21100(MBC )03/93] ❑ Reinstall the coolant recovery reservoir cap
by installing the cap to the fully installed
position.
[SV21110(MBC )03/93] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap to the pressure
relief position by installing the cap to the
fully installed position, and then backing off
to the first stop.
257
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV21200(MBC )03/93] ❑ Start and idle engine until the radiator upper
hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is
open and coolant is flowing through the
entire system).
[SV21300(MBC )03/93] ❑ Immediately shut off engine. Cover cap
completely with a thick cloth and cautiously
remove radiator pressure cap and add a
50/50 mixture of recommended coolant and
water until system is full.
[SV21400(MBC )03/91] ❑ Reinstall the radiator cap securely.
[SV21500(MBC )05/94] ❑ Remove the cap from the engine coolant
recovery reservoir and add a 50/50 mixture
of recommended cooling system fluid and
water to the FULL-HOT mark on the engine
coolant recovery reservoir. Check that
reservoir hose is not kinked.
[SV21800(MBC )03/93] ❑ Reinstall the reservoir cap.
*[SV21900(MBC )05/95] ❑ Check for leaks at the draincock, block plug
and vent plug.
*[SV22000(MBC )03/95] ❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the

recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
[SV22012(M )05/95] 4.6L (2V) engine only — GT models
*[SV22014( ALL)03/95] ❑ With the engine OFF and cool, remove the
pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.
Remove the heater hose and clamp, located
on the rear of the intake manifold.
*[SV22021( ALL)03/95] ❑ Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and

water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill
Capacities later in this chapter for the correct
amount. Add coolant to the reservoir until
the coolant continuously flows out of the tube
in the rear of engine. Reattach hose and
secure clamp.
258
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV22026( ALL)03/95] ❑ Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant

is at the FULL COLD level.
*[SV22031( ALL)05/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap to the fully

installed position.
*[SV22036( ALL)05/95] ❑ Start and idle the engine until the radiator
upper hose is warm (this indicates the
thermostat is open and coolant is flowing
through the entire system).
*[SV22041( ALL)03/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.
Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap and
add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water until the coolant is at the COLD FILL
level in the coolant reservoir.
*[SV22046( ALL)03/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap securely.

*[SV22050( ALL)03/95] ❑ Check for leaks at the draincock.
*[SV22055( ALL)03/95] ❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the
recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
%*[SV22090( ALL)03/95] Battery
Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft
*[SV22100( ALL)02/95] maintenance-free battery. When the original
equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it
may be replaced by a Motorcraft
Low-Maintenance Battery.
The Low-Maintenance Battery has removable
*[SV22130( ALL)06/95] vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and
for adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte
level should be checked at least every 24 months
or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in temperatures up
to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures
above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in
each cell up to the level indicator. Do not
overfill.
259
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
If the level gets low, you can add tap water to

*[SV22145( ALL)02/95] the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or
doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content.
However, if possible you should refill the battery
with distilled water. If the battery needs water
quite often, have the charging system checked
for a possible malfunction.
%
*[SV22160( ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment
Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that
*[SV22175( ALL)04/95] used lead-acid batteries be returned to an
authorized recycling facility for disposal.
*[SV22190( ALL)03/95]
Battery recycling symbol
% [SV22192(M )03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically

controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install
a new battery, or experience a dead battery, you
must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle
conditions before your vehicle will idle at its
best. To let the engine do this, put the gearshift
in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or Neutral
(manual transmission), turn off all the
accessories, and start the vehicle. Let the engine
idle for at least one minute. (Engine must be
warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allow
approximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and go
traffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely
“relearn” its idle.
260
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV22198(M )09/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.8L

engine you will need to perform
additional steps after the battery has
been disconnected, jump started or
replaced. See Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance Testing in
Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.
% *[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and
Wipers
%
*[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid
[SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid
periodically, or when the optional lamp indicates
low fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid is
located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment. Visual inspection can determine if
the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate the
washer when the reservoir is empty.
[SV22900(M )10/95]
The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid
261
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996

Do not put windshield washer fluid in the
container for the engine coolant.
Use specially formulated windshield washer
%
*[SV23500( ALL)01/95] fluid rather than plain water, because specially
formulated washer fluids contain additives that
dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such
as methanol should be used in freezing weather
(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local
regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common
antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection
without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,
wiper blades, and windshield washer system.
%
*[SV23600( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades
Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice
*[SV23700( ALL)03/95] a year. Also check them whenever they seem
less effective than usual. Substances such as tree
sap and some hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness
of wiper blades.
If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both
*[SV23800( ALL)09/95] the windshield and the wiper blades. Use
undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do
not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will
damage your blades.
To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply
*[SV23900( ALL)03/95] turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn
your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a
vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF
position. Do not move the wipers manually.
262
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Manually moving the wipers across the

windshield may damage them.
Wiper blade replacement
*[SV24000( ALL)03/01]
If the wiper blades still do not work properly
*[SV24100( ALL)09/95] after you clean them, you may need to replace
the wiper blade assembly or the blade element.
When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade
refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part
or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the
instructions that come with them.
%*[SV24200( ALL)03/95] Tires
Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel
*[SV24300( ALL)03/95] tank. If one tire looks lower than the others,
check the pressure in all of them. Always follow
these precautions:
*[SV24500( ALL)03/95] ❑ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended

pressures.
*[SV24600( ALL)02/95] ❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see

Load limits in the Index).
*[SV24700( ALL)02/95] ❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly

distributed.
*[SV24800( ALL)10/89] ❑ Drive at safe speeds.

If you do not take these precautions, your tires
*[SV24900( ALL)01/95] may fail or go flat.
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying
*[SV24950( ALL)07/95] posted speed limits.

Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to
vehicle components.
263
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
At least once a month, check the pressure in all

%
*[SV25200( ALL)05/95] your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire
pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least one hour or has
been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can
find proper cold pressure and load limits of
recommended size tires on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.

Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
%
*[SV25500( ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation
Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires
*[SV25600( ALL)04/95] perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly
and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the
following diagram.
For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance
*[SV25700( ALL)01/95] Schedule. If you notice that the tires wear
unevenly, have them checked.
264
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV25900(M )03/93]
Rotating the tires
%
*[SV26500( ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires
Replace any tires that show wear bands. When
*[SV26600( ALL)05/95] your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16
inch (2 mm) of tread left.
% [SV26700( ALL)05/94]
A worn-out tire
Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,

*[SV26800( ALL)01/95] you may need to replace them before a wear
band appears across the entire tread. Some spots
wear more heavily than others.
265
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996

When replacing full size tires, never mix
radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use
only the tire sizes that are listed on the
tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires
are the same size, speed rating, and
load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire
combinations recommended on the decal.
If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and
safely.
Tires that are larger or smaller than your
*[SV27100( ALL)01/95] vehicle’s original tires may also affect the
accuracy of your speedometer.
%
*[SV28100( ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades
New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their
*[SV28200( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded
into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality
Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic
*[SV28250( ALL)01/95] tires for use on passenger cars. They do not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined in Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire
*[SV28300( ALL)01/95] quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford to give you the
following information about tire grades exactly
as the government has written it.
266
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV28399( ALL)01/95] Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
*[SV28400( ALL)01/95] based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
*[SV28499( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
*[SV28500( ALL)01/95] A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests
and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
*[SV28599( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
*[SV28600( ALL)01/95] and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
267
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
represent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
%
*[SV28700( ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains
[SV28801(M )08/93] The 15 in. and 16 in. tires on your vehicle have
all-weather treads that provide traction in rain
or snow. However, during the winter months in
some climates, you may need to use snow tires
and occasionally chains for your tires.

Snow tires must be the same size and
grade as the tires you currently have on
your vehicle.
[SV28910(M )05/95] For your Mustang GT models equipped with 17

in. tires, to achieve the best traction during snow
and ice conditions, purchase 245/45ZR17 mud
and snow tires.
Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or
*[SV29000( ALL)02/95] if the law requires them where you live. If you
choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be
aware of the following:
*[SV29100( ALL)01/95] ❑ Make sure the chains are the right size for
your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.
Other types may damage your vehicle.
[SV29110(M )05/95] ❑ Use only Cable Type chains if your vehicle is
equipped with the P225/55ZR16 or
245/45ZR17 tires. Use of SAE Class “S”
chains or other types may damage your
vehicle.
268
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV29200( ALL)01/95] ❑ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held
down securely. Verify that no chain touches
any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
*[SV29300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub
or bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicle
and tighten the chains. If you continue to
hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage
to your vehicle.
*[SV29400( ALL)10/94] ❑ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV29500( ALL)05/94] ❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity
after using them on snow and ice. Do not use
the chains on dry roads.
%
*[SV29600( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels
Wash the wheels with the same detergent you
*[SV29700( ALL)05/95] use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use
acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,
fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil
remover to remove grease and tar.
NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if
*[SV29800( ALL)09/95] the brushes are abrasive.
%*[SV30450( ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid
Under normal circumstances, you do not need to
*[SV30475( ALL)01/95] check the fluid level of the transmission, since
your vehicle does not use up transmission fluid.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet for replacement intervals. However, if
the transmission is not working properly — for
instance, the transmission may slip or shift
slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid
leakage — the fluid level should be checked.
269
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV30550( ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is preferable to check the transmission fluid
*[SV30560( ALL)05/95] level at normal operating temperature
150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately 20
miles (30 km) of driving. However, if necessary,
you can check the fluid level without having to
drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a normal
operating temperature if outside temperatures
are above 50˚F (10˚C).
[SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the
engine and, while fully applying the brake
pedal, move the transmission shift selector
through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient
time for each position to engage. Securely latch
the transmission shift selector in the P (Park)
position, fully set the parking brake and leave
the engine running.
[SV30625(MBC )03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven if
the fluid level is below the low cold
reading on the dipstick.
Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out
*[SV30650( ALL)02/95] and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the
dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure
it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read
the fluid level.
[SV30675(MBC )10/95] When checking fluid at normal operating
temperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluid
level should be within the hot notched area on
the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been
driven, and the fluid is at room temperature
50˚F-95˚F (10˚C-35˚C), the fluid level should be
within the cold notched area.
270
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an

*[SV30715( ALL)01/95] extended period at high speeds or in
city traffic during hot weather, or
pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to
allow the fluid to cool before checking.
%
*[SV30725( ALL)08/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid
[SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct
type will be used. Use only MERCONH fluid.
Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through
*[SV30775( ALL)03/95] the filler tube to bring the level to the correct
area on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If the
level is above the top hole on the dipstick,
excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
%
[SV30825(MBC )03/93]
Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick
271
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
% [SV30875(M )12/94] Manual Transmission Fluid

% [SV30925(M )03/95] The fluid level and quality should not
deteriorate under normal driving conditions.
However, it is suggested that you have the fluid
level checked occasionally. If fluid is required,
see Lubricant Specifications in the Index.
%*[SV30950(M )02/95] The Clutch
[SV30975(M )12/94] The clutch on your vehicle is operated by a
cable that adjusts itself with a little help from
you. Complete the following steps every
5,000-6,000 miles (10,000 km) to adjust the
clutch.
[SV31001(M )01/89] 1. Turn your engine off and put your gearshift
in First.
[SV31025(M )10/89] 2. Put your foot under the clutch pedal and
gently pull it up until the pedal stops.
[SV31050(M )01/89] 3. Then push the clutch down slowly. You will
hear a click if your clutch needed adjusting
and adjusted itself.
%*[SV31900( ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid
Under normal circumstances, your vehicle
*[SV32000( ALL)04/95] should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,
expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall
as you put more mileage on your vehicle and
the brake lining wears.
[SV32300(M )03/95] Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engine
oil change or at least once a year. You can do
this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic
reservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see label
on reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder,
see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluid
level should be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
272
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996

Brake fluid is toxic.
If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with
*[SV32375( ALL)07/95] running water for 15 minutes. Get medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally,
drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove
*[SV32400( ALL)03/95] the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to
the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT
3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA, C6AZ-19542-BA,
or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A.

If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT
3, you will cause permanent damage to
your brakes.
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.
*[SV33200( ALL)01/95]
[SV33400(M )05/95]
The brake fluid reservoir — 3.8L engines
273
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV33450(M )05/95]
The brake fluid reservoir — 4.6L engines
If you find that the fluid level is excessively low

*[SV33700( ALL)01/95] — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the
plastic reservoir — have the brake system
inspected.

Do not let the reservoir for the master
cylinder run dry. This may cause the
brakes to fail.
%*[SV34800( ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

Check the level of the power steering fluid at
*[SV34900( ALL)01/95] least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
%
*[SV35000( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power Steering
Fluid
[SV35055(M )10/95] 3.8L SFI engine (check warm)
1. Start the engine and let it run until the
*[SV35100( ALL)02/95] power steering fluid reaches normal
operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when
the engine coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster is near the center of the
NORMAL operating temperature range.
274
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering

*[SV35200( ALL)01/95] wheel back and forth several times. Make
sure that the cap assembly is installed at this
time.
3. Turn the engine off.
*[SV35300( ALL)05/95]
4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which
*
% [SV35400(MBC )03/94]
is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The
fluid level should be between the arrows in
the FULL HOT range, which is marked on
the side of the dipstick, opposite the side
marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the
level is within the FULL HOT range.
5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid
*[SV35500(MBC )07/94] in small amounts, continuously checking the
level, until you reach the FULL HOT range.
Do not overfill.
6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back
*[SV35600(MBC )03/95] in and make sure that it fits snugly.
[SV35700(MBC )12/94]
The dipstick for power steering fluid
275
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV35875(M GV)03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford
Specification MerconH ATF XT-2-QDX.
If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive
*[SV35900( ALL)01/95] your vehicle for a long period of time before
adding fluid. This can damage the power
steering pump.
If you check the power steering fluid when it is
*[SV36100(MBC )02/95] cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL
COLD range on the dipstick. The reading will
only be accurate if the fluid temperature is
approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).
[SV36105(M )10/95] NOTE: The brakes on the 4.6L engine vehicles
are powered by power steering fluid
from the power steering pump. The
fluid level in the power steering
reservoir will rise and fall due to the
amount of charge in the brake booster
accumulator. Therefore the following is
required.
[SV36157(M )10/95] 4.6L SFI engine (check cold)
[SV36170(MBC )03/95] 1. Check the fluid level when the system is
COLD (allow at least one half hour after
driving for the power steering fluid to cool).
[SV36171(MBC )10/95] 2. Locate the power steering reservoir mounted
to the front upper left-hand corner of the
engine.
276
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV36174(M )10/95] NOTE: Brake fluid and power steering fluid

CAN NOT be mixed. Only add brake
fluid to the brake master cylinder
reservoir. Only add power steering
fluid to the power steering reservoir.
[SV36179(M )10/95] 3. Visually verify that the fluid level is above
the MIN line adjacent to the reservoir “sight
window.”
[SV36183(M )10/95] 4. If the power steering fluid is below the MIN
line, remove the cap and add fluid in small
amounts until the level is between the MIN
and MAX lines.
[SV36186(M )10/95] 5. Reinstall the reservoir cap.
[SV36188(M)02/96] It is normal for the fluid level to be above the
MAX line after the brake pedal has been pushed
several times with the engine off. (If you want
to double check it; restart the engine and turn
steering wheel to full right turn, the full left turn
and then turn engine off and re-check fluid
level. It should be between the MIN and MAX
line.)
277
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV36195(M )10/95]
Fluid level for power steering
[SV36225(M )03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford
Specification MerconH ATF XT-2-QDX.
NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, do
*[SV36250(MBC )03/95] not drive your vehicle for a long
period of time before adding fluid.
This can damage the power steering
pump.
% [SV36300(MBC )12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses and
Circuit Breakers
Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuit
*[SV36400( ALL)03/95] breakers protect your vehicle’s wiring system
from overloading. If electrical parts in your
vehicle are not working, the system may have
been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a
circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any
electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses
(conventional and high current) or circuit
breakers.
278
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
The following charts tell you which fuses or

*[SV36600( ALL)03/95] circuit breakers protect the wiring for each
electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or
a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of
your vehicle that use that circuit will not work.
Once you have determined which fuses or circuit
*[SV36610( ALL)01/95] breakers to check, follow the procedures under
Checking and replacing fuses or Checking and
replacing circuit breakers in this chapter.
[SV36700(M )03/93]
The instrument panel fuse panel location
279
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV37200(M )06/93]
The instrument panel fuse panel
280
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV37500( ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, Circuit
Breakers and Relays
[SV37600(M )06/93]
thirty-four pica chart:0010389-G
281
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV37700(M )10/95]
twenty-four pica chart:0010492-G
%
*[SV39000( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses
High current fuses are circuit protectors that are
*[SV39200( ALL)01/95] part of the wiring harness for some electrical
equipment. These, like fuses, open when the
circuit load exceeds their amperage rating. High
current fuses may be purchased from your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
The high current fuse panel is located in the
*[SV39300(MBC )01/95] engine compartment on the left-hand fender
apron.
282
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996

Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
Ford recommends that high current fuses be
*[SV39700( ALL)07/95] replaced by a qualified technician.
[SV39800(M )08/93]
The high current fuse panel location
283
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
% [SV40100( ALL)06/93] The high current fuse panel

[SV40300(M )10/95]
two third page art:0011159-C
284
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV40600( ALL)06/93] The high current fuses and relays

[SV40800(M )05/95]
thirty-two pica chart:0011160-B
285
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV40900(M )10/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0011161-C
286
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV41210( ALL)06/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses
If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:
*[SV41215( ALL)02/95]
[SV41220(M )03/93] 1. Find the fuse panel cover below and to left
of the steering column, in the instrument
panel. Pull outward on the handle below the
word “fuses” to expose the fuse panel.
Squeeze the two backing tabs and pull to
remove the cover.
[SV41235(M )03/93] 2. On the fuse panel cover, find the number of
the fuse you want to check. The following
fuse panel cover tells you where to locate
the fuse on the panel.
3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look
*[SV41500(M )01/95] through the clear side of the fuse to see if
the metal wire inside is separated. If it is,
the fuse should be replaced.
[SV41550( ALL)05/92]
The side view of a fuse
4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right

*[SV41800(M )11/94] amperage rating. (See the following chart.)
[SV41900( ALL)07/95]
eight pica chart:0001092-B
287
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV41910(M GV)01/94]
six pica chart:0001093-B

Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start
a fire.
5. Replace the cover.
*[SV42650(M )01/95]
Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to
*[SV42800( ALL)01/95] blow if you do not find what caused the
overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have
your electrical system checked.
%
*[SV42900( ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers
If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on
*[SV43000( ALL)01/95] the fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses in
this chapter to find out how to locate the fuse
panel.
[SV43200( ALL)12/94] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow
the electrical parts to work again once the
overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit
breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your
vehicle’s electrical system checked.
Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit
*[SV43250( ALL)02/95] breakers. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the
*[SV43300( ALL)08/95] same amperage rating. To remove a circuit
breaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it with
your finger and thumb and pull it straight out
of its socket.
288
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Since the circuit breaker for the headlamps is

*[SV43800(M GV)02/95] mounted in the headlamp switch, you must
replace the entire switch to install a new circuit
breaker.
%*[SV44400( ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement
It is a good idea to check the operation of the
*[SV44500( ALL)01/95] following lights frequently:
*[SV44600( ALL)01/95] ❑ headlamps

*[SV44700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps
*[SV44800( ALL)01/95] ❑ brakelamps
*[SV44900( ALL)01/95] ❑ hazard flasher
*[SV44950( ALL)02/95] ❑ high-mount brakelamp
*[SV45000( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals
*[SV45200( ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp
[SV45400(M )08/93] ❑ fog lamps (GT and Cobra models)
The alignment of your headlamps should be
%
*[SV45600( ALL)01/95] checked if:
*[SV45700( ALL)01/95] ❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to

turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you
do not have the high beams on
*[SV45800( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you

enough light to see clearly at night
*[SV45900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially

away from a position slightly down and to
the right
289
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV46000( ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb
The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable
*[SV46100( ALL)01/95] bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace
the bulb, rather than the whole lamp.

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully
and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp
the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the
next time the headlamps are operated.
Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you
*[SV46300( ALL)01/95] can immediately replace it with a new one. If a
bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the headlamp housing
and affect its performance.
[SV46450(M )03/90]
Parts of a headlamp
Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV46600( ALL)03/95]
1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in
*[SV46700( ALL)01/95] the OFF position.
[SV46705(M )05/95] 2. Open the hood and locate the headlamp
access cover. Remove the plastic pushpin.
290
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV46710(M )05/95]
Headlamp access covers
[SV46875(M )08/93] 3. Lift the cover and find the bulb in the
headlamp socket.
[SV47125(M )06/93] 4. Remove the electrical connector from the
bulb by lifting the connector clip upward
while pulling the connector rearward.
[SV47250(M )08/93] 5. Remove the retaining ring by turning
counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn to free it
from the socket. Then slide the ring off the
plastic base. Keep the ring. You must use it
again to hold the new bulb in place.
[SV47300(M )11/92] 6. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its
socket by gently pulling it rearward without
turning.
291
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV47400( ALL)03/95]
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base
*[SV47600(MBC )02/95] facing upward, insert the glass end of the
bulb into the socket. You may need to turn
the bulb left or right to line up the grooves
in the plastic base with the tabs in the
socket. When the grooves are aligned, push
the bulb into the socket until the plastic base
contacts the rear of the socket.
2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic
*[SV47800(MBC )08/95] base until it contacts the rear of the socket.
Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it
clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of
*[SV47900( ALL)02/95] the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into
position.
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that
*[SV48000(MBC )02/95] they work properly. If the headlamp was
correctly aligned before you changed the
bulb, you should not need to align it again.
[SV48075(M )05/95] 5. Reinstall the headlamp cover pushpin and
tighten until snug.
292
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV51600( ALL)10/92] Using the Right Bulbs
[SV51700(M )05/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0010438-G
293
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%*[SV52400( ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
*[SV52500( ALL)05/95] converter which enables your vehicle to comply
with applicable exhaust emission requirements.

Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes into
the passenger compartment. Under
extreme conditions excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the fuel
system, the interior floor covering, or
other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and the
*[SV52600( ALL)05/95] other emission control parts continue to work
properly:
*[SV52700( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV52800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Avoid running out of fuel.
*[SV52900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.
*[SV52950( ALL)01/95] ❑ Do not push start your vehicle.

*[SV53000( ALL)03/95] ❑ Have the services listed in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet performed
according to the specified schedule. The
scheduled maintenance services are required
because they are considered essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
In general, maintenance, replacement, or service
*[SV53075( ALL)03/95] of the emissions control devices or systems in
your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or
engine may be performed at your expense by
any automotive repair establishment or
individual using automotive parts equivalent to
294
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
those which your vehicle or engine was

originally equipped.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine
*[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or
Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized
remanufactured parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for the service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts
should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor
Company parts in performance and durability. It
is the owner’s responsibility to determine the
equivalency of such parts. Please consult your
warranty booklet for complete warranty
information.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss
*[SV53200( ALL)05/95] of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the
check engine light, or the temperature warning
light. These sometimes indicate that the emission
system is not working properly.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your
*[SV53300( ALL)01/95] vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more
unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can
increase the temperature of the engine or
exhaust system.
By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,
*[SV53400( ALL)01/95] services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device
or prevent it from working. In some of the
United States and in Canada, vehicle owners
295
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
may be liable if their emission control device is

removed or is prevented from working.
Never use a metal exhaust collector when you
*[SV53500( ALL)02/92] service your vehicle. If the metal collector
contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or
bumper parts they could melt or deform.
Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate
*[SV53600( ALL)01/95] properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on
for more than five seconds after you shut it off
or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
Information about your vehicle’s emission
%
*[SV53700( ALL)05/95] control system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement
and gives some tune-up specifications.
%
*[SV53702( ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
Testing
In some localities it may become a legal
*[SV53715( ALL)07/95] requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the
vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has
just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to
a not ready for I/M testing condition. To
prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a
“need for additional mixed city and highway
driving to complete the check” of the OBD II
system. As soon as all of the OBD II system
checks are successfully completed, the OBD II
system is set to the ready condition. The amount
of driving required to reach the ready condition
varies with individual driving patterns. To
complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle
defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or
does not want to do the additional driving
required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of
repair work.
296
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV53717( ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

[SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the order
shown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps.
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according
*[SV53735( ALL)06/95] to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
The engine must be warmed up and at
*[SV53740( ALL)07/95] operating temperature before proceeding with
the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive
Cycle.
1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)
*[SV53745( ALL)06/95] the vehicle for 4 minutes.
[SV53750(M )05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual
transmissions) for 40 seconds.
[SV53755(M )05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h)
(for manual transmissions up shift from 1st
to 5th gear, but hold in second for at least 5
seconds) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10
seconds.
4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at
*[SV53760(M )05/95] 45 mph (72 km/h) (manual transmissions
use 5th gear) for 30 seconds.
5. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual
*[SV53765(M )08/95] transmissions) for 40 seconds.
297
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at

*[SV53770(M )05/95] speeds between 25 and 40 mph
(40-64 km/h) (manual transmissions
primarily drive vehicles in 3rd and 4th gear
when possible) for 15 minutes. During the 15
minute drive cycle the following modes must
be achieved:
a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10
*[SV53772( ALL)07/95] seconds each
b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2
*[SV53775( ALL)07/95] throttle position, and
c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5
*[SV53777( ALL)07/95] minute steady state throttle drives.
[SV53782(M )05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and
60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions
upshift to 5th gear). This should take
approximately 5 minutes.
8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at
*[SV53786(M )05/95] the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th
gear) for approximately 5 minutes.
9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying
*[SV53790(M )05/95] speeds between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th
gear).
10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive
*[SV53794(M )05/95] (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for 40
seconds.
11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.
*[SV53796( ALL)07/95] Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.
298
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
*[SV53800( ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,

and Lubricant Specifications
%
*[SV53900( ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities
[SV54000(M )10/95]
thirty-two pica chart:0010445-M
299
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be

*[SV54550( ALL)09/95] replaced every 100,000 miles
(160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the
lube should not be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair
required.
%
*[SV54600( ALL)10/95] Motorcraft Parts
[SV54700(M )03/95]
fourteen pica chart:0010451-M
[SV55000( ALL)09/94] If a spark plug is removed for examination, it

must be reinstalled in the same cylinder.
[SV55025(MBC )05/94] For 3.8L engines:
[SV55050(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3 have an EG suffix.
[SV55075(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #4, #5, #6 have an E suffix.
[SV55100( ALL)05/95] For 4.6L (2V) engines:
[SV55125( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3, #4 have a PG suffix.
[SV55150( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #5, #6, #7, #8 have a P suffix.
[SV55200( ALL)03/95] If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only
spark plugs with the service number suffix letter
as shown on the engine decal.
300
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
%
*[SV55300( ALL)05/95] Lubricant Specifications
[SV55400(M )03/95]
twenty-eight pica chart:0010580-I
301
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
[SV55500(M )03/95]
ten pica chart:0010581-F
NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be

*[SV56400( ALL)09/95] replaced every 100,000 miles
(160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the
lube should not be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair
required.
%*[SV57000( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage
*[SV57100( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
*[SV57150( ALL)01/95] extended period of time (60 days or more), refer
to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
General
*[SV57200( ALL)01/95]
*[SV57300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
*[SV57400( ALL)01/95] ❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible.
*[SV57500( ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against rust
and damage.
302
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Body
*[SV57600( ALL)01/95]
*[SV57700( ALL)01/95] ❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,
grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,
rear wheel housing and underside of front
fenders.
*[SV57800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed

locations.
*[SV57900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent

rust.
*[SV58000( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a

thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the
vehicle is washed.
*[SV58100( ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges
and latches with a light grade oil.
*[SV58200( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV58300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
%
*[SV58350( ALL)01/95]
*[SV58400( ALL)01/95] ❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle
until it reaches normal operating temperature.
*[SV58500( ALL)01/95] ❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all
the gears while the engine is running.
Fuel system
%
*[SV58600( ALL)01/95]
*
% [SV58700( ALL)07/94] ❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle
*[SV58900( ALL)03/95] storage (60 days or more), fuel may
deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in
the fuel system and may also clog
small orifices.
303
File:15rcsvm.ex
Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996
Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever

*[SV59000( ALL)01/95] actual or expected storage periods exceed 60
days. Follow the instructions on the label. The
vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to
circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
%
*[SV59200( ALL)01/95]
*[SV59300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Protect against freezing temperatures.
Battery
*
% [SV59400( ALL)01/95]
*[SV59500( ALL)01/95] ❑ Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV59600( ALL)01/95] ❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a
light coat of grease.
*[SV59650( ALL)03/95] ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days

without recharging the battery, it may be
advisable to disconnect the battery cables to
ensure battery charge is maintained for quick
starting.
[SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, it
will be necessary to reset memory
features.
Brakes
%
*[SV59700( ALL)01/95]
*[SV59800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully
released.
Tires
%
*[SV59900( ALL)01/95]
*[SV60000( ALL)05/95] ❑ Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
*[SV60100( ALL)01/95]
*[SV60200( ALL)01/95] ❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
clevis pins under vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
*[SV60300( ALL)03/95] ❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15

days to lubricate working parts and prevent
corrosion.
304
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00450(M )10/95]
Label Locations
305
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00500(M )05/95]
Front Exterior View
306
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00600(M )10/95]
full page art:0011098-F
Rear Exterior View (GT Shown)
307
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00800(M )05/95]
full page art:0011100-F
Driver’s Door
308
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00900(M )05/95]
full page art:0011311-C
Interior View
309
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI00950(M )05/95]
Instrument Panel
310
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI01000(M )05/95]
Mustang GT Instrument Cluster
311
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI01010(M )05/95]
Mustang Instrument Cluster
312
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI01100(M )10/95]
full page art:0011126-G
Trunk
313
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI01200(M )10/95]
3.8L Engine Compartment
314
File:16rcqim.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996
[QI01300(M )05/95]
4.6L (2V) Engine Compartment — GT Models Only
315
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Index
A
ABS warning light
(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 65
Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 49
Accessory power source,
power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 130
Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 249
Air bag supplemental restraint system
and child safety seats . . . . . . . . 24, 30
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 25
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
service and information labels . . . . . . 25
tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Air cleaner filter
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Air conditioning, manual heating and air
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 111
Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Antenna, radio (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . 141, 173
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 252
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Index 317
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . . . . 212

Anti-theft system
arming the system . . . . . . . . . . 105
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
disarming an untriggered system . . . . 106
disarming a triggered system. . . . . . 107
triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 107
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . 218
Assistance (see Customer assistance). . . . 215
Audio system (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . 84
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic overdrive . . . 177, 180
fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 298
fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Axle
lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 300
refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
B
Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 183
Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Battery
acid, treating emergencies . . . . . 199, 260
battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
charging system warning light . . . . . . 68
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 260
how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 199
maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 259
proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 260
replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 299
318 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Battery (continued)
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 303
Brake fluid
brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 64
checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 272
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Brakelamp, bulb replacement . . . . . . . 292
Brakes
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 186
brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 64
fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 272
fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . 272, 298
fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 300
front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . 186
master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186–187
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
stopping distances . . . . . . . . . . 190
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 303
Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Bulbs
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Index 319
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
C
Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 223
Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 298
Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 56
Car seats for children
(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 30
Cassette tape player (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . 141, 145, 162, 168
Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CD player (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . 148, 154, 155
Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 76
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 68
Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 28
child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child safety seats
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30
automatic locking mode
(retractor) . . . . . . . 14, 15, 30, 32, 39
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30
in front seat, convertible . . . . . . . . . 32
in front seat, coupe . . . . . . . . . . . 39
in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . 30, 39
in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chime
key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Circuit breakers
checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 287
see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Cleaning your vehicle
CD player and discs. . . . . . . . 152, 159
chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 7
320 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Cleaning your vehicle (continued)

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 242
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . . 89
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 125
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Climate control system
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
heating only system. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Clutch
adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
operation while driving . . . . . . . . 182
recommended shift speeds. . . . . . . 184
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 183
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . 9, 11
Compact disc player (see Electronic sound
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Index 321
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Controls
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Convertible
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
installation of the boot. . . . . . . . . 134
lowering the convertible top . . . . . . 132
raising the convertible top . . . . . . . 137
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 303
proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 73
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Crankcase emission filter . . . . . . . . . 299
Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . . 97
Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . 217
Customer Assistance Centre,
Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . 217, 223
D
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . 79
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . 84
Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Defrost
rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dipstick
automatic transmission fluid . . . . 269, 271
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . 274
Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 213
Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 218
322 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 300
Driving under special conditions
bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . 190
towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
E
Electrical system
circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 286
operating when the engine is off . . . . . 49
power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electronic sound system
radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . 142, 163
warranty and service information . . . 175
Electronic stereo cassette radio
(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 142
Emergencies, roadside
assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . 199
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . 187–188
Emission control system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 293
emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 293
Engine
check engine warning light . . . . . . . 70
does not start . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57
fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . 51, 53
fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . 57
preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . 51–52
service points . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Index 323
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Engine (continued)
starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 53
starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 57
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . 301–302
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Engine coolant
checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
disposal . . . . . . . . . 236, 251, 256, 271
drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
low coolant warning light . . . . . . . . 68
preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 303
proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . 239, 252
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Engine coolant temperature gauge
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73–74
Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Engine knocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter . . . . . 249, 251
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
disposal . . . . . . . . . 236, 251, 256, 271
engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 77
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 299
low oil warning light . . . . . . . . . . 65
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 300
synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . 248–249
“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248–249
Entry system, remote . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4
324 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
F
Fan
engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . . 236
Federal Communications Commission . . . 174
Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . 298
Foglamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 217
Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 218
Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4
Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 223
Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 224
French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3
Fuel
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 243
filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 242
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 299
fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 242
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . 243–244
quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 246
safety information relating to
automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 245
storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 302
treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 245
Fuel cap
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 242–243
Fuel filler door
remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 299
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Index 325
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuse panels
engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 282
high current fuse panel . . . . . . . . 283
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 278, 286
Fuses
charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 286
checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 286
circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 242
Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . 243
Gasohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Gauges, Mechanical
engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 73
engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 77
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 192
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Gearshift
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 177
console-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 179
downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
326 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Gearshift (continued)
floor-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
locking the gearshift . . . . . . . . . . 49
manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . 182
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 183
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . 177, 183
shift-lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
upshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). . . 192
calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 192
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
H
Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Headlamps
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
bulb specification . . . . . . . . . . . 292
checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 288
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 84
flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 288–290
turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Heating
heater only system . . . . . . . . . . . 82
heating and air conditioning system . . . 80
High beams
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 92
Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Index 327
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . 300
release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
working under the hood . . . . . . . . 236
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 217
Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . 204, 236, 260
Ignition
chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 49
removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 61
Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . 28, 30
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Instrument panel
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . 87
location of components . . . . . . . . . 79
Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 92–93
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209
positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 204
328 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
K
Keys
key in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 51
positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 49
removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 50
stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . 49, 51
L
Lamps
bulb replacement specifications chart . . 292
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
daytime running light system . . . . . . 84
dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 87–88
flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 92
fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 128
instrument panel, dimming . . . . . . . 87
interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 87
map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . 91
Lights, warning and indicator
air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . . . 65
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 77
hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . 94
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
low oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Index 329
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Lights, warning and indicator (continued)

safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 70
theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . 72, 91
Load limits
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 300
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 131
Lug nuts
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . 211
M
Maintenance schedule and record
(see separate Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . 3
Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 235
Manual transmission
backing up (reverse). . . . . . . . . . 183
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 272
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . . 272
fluid capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
shifting gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
shift speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 272
Methanol in fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
330 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 125
side view mirrors (manual) . . . . . . 127
vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . 128
Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
N
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 222
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5
O
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 243–244
Odometer
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 299
Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . 248–249
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 295
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
P
Panic alarm feature, remote entry system . 111
Parking brake
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . 299
PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . 299
Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . . 278
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Power features
door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 127
seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Index 331
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Power point electrical outlet . . . . . . . 130

Power steering
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274–275
driving with power steering . . . . . . 186
fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . . 274
fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 298
fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 300
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 141
Rear axle
lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . 300
refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear window
defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 298
Regulations, National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Remote control, trunk . . . . . . . . . . 132
Remote entry system
arming and disarming the anti-theft system111
illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . . . 112
locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . 110
opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . 110
panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
replacement/additional transmitters. . . 113
replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . 112
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 222
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
332 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 199
Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
S
Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 9
Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . 196
Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 222
Safety information relating to
automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts . . . . 11, 13, 15
automatic locking mode . . . . . . . 14–15
automatic locking mode (retractor) . . 14–15
cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 21
extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 20
for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . 9
head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . 9, 11
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
warning light and chime . . . . . . . . 66
Safety seats for children
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30–31
attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 30
automatic locking mode
(retractor) . . . . . . . 14–15, 30, 32, 39
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
in front seat, convertible. . . . . . . . . 32
in front seat, coupe . . . . . . . . . . . 39
in rear outboard . . . . . . . . 30, 32, 39
in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . 30
Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . . . 9
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Index 333
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Seats (continued)
adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 117
adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . 120
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 125
folding rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . 124
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
rear seat access . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Servicing your vehicle
precautions when servicing . . . . . . 236
servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 213
Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . 177, 183
Shoulder and lap belts
(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . 9, 11
Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints). . . . . 11
Side mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 268
Spare tire
changing the tire . . . . . . . . . 205, 207
conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 206
finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 206
removing the spare tire . . . . . . 206–207
storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . 206, 209
temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 299
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . 190
Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . 300
Speed control
accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . 101
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . 101
tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . 100–101
turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
when towing a trailer . . . . . . . 197–198
334 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . 52
starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . 53
starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . 53
starting your vehicle if the battery
is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Steering wheel
horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Storage compartments
center console . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 67
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 22
T
Tachometer
mechanical cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tail lamps
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 288, 292
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 80
Tether anchor installation
(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 30
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tires
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
checking the pressure . . . . . . . 263–264
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 263
replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Index 335
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Tires (continued)
snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 268
spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 303
tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . 265–266
treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 267
wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 194
Towing your vehicle
using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 213
with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . 185
Trailer towing
calculating maximum
trailer weight. . . . . . . . . . 194–195
safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Transmission
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 177
fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . 270
fluid, checking and adding (manual) . . 272
fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 298
manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Transmission control switch . . . . . . . 180
Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . 110
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Trunk
remote release lever . . . . . . . . . . 132
using the keys to open . . . . . . . . 131
using the remote entry system
to open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
336 Index
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . 295

Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 91
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
U
Upshift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Used engine oil, disposal . . 236, 251, 256, 271
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . 92–93
VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)
decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 217
Vehicle loading
automatic transmissions . . . . . . . . 192
calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 192
manual transmissions . . . . . . . . . 192
understanding loading information . . . 192
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Ventilating your vehicle
(see Climate control) . . . . . . . 80–81, 83
Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . 248–249
Visor (see Sun visor) . . . . . . . . . . 128
Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . 68
W
Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Warning chimes
key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning lights (see Lights). . . . . . . . . 61
Warranties
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Index 337
File:rcixm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996
Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4

Washer fluid
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 192
Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . 300
Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . 213
Wheels
anti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . . . . 212
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209, 211
inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 263
lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Windows
manual windows, operating . . . . . . 114
one-touch down. . . . . . . . . . 114–115
power windows, operating . . . . . . . 114
rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Windshield, washing. . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 261
checking and replacing wiper blades . . 262
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 300
variable interval wipers . . . . . . . 92–93
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . 92
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
338 Index
File:17rcgsm.ex
Update:Wed Mar 27 09:39:33 1996
Service Station
Information
[GS00150(M )10/95]
twenty-six pica chart:0011195-H
340

1996 Ford Mustang Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1996 Ford Mustang Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

File:01rcpim.

thirty-six pica chart:

thirty-six pica chart:

Introductory Information ............................... 1

*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the

*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our

*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our

*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life.

*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We

*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct

*[IN01100( ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using

*[IN01400( ALL)07/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[IN01500( ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

% *[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

Paint damage resulting from fallout is not

*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR02700( ALL)06/95] RWARNING

*[SR02801( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[SR02901( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

*[SR03001( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

*[SR03200( ALL)09/95] RWARNING

%*[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder

one third page art:0011200-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

one third page art:0011225-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

one third page art:0010502-A

Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt

NOTE: Be sure to read and understand

Automatic locking mode

*[SR04687( ALL)08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.

*[SR04689( ALL)09/95] RWARNING

[SR04695( ALL)09/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder

*[SR04705(M )08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SR04720(M )09/95] RWARNING

[SR04725(M )03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt.

*[SR05400( ALL)07/95] RWARNING

*[SR05600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:

quarter page art:0010559-F

Unfastening the front (coupes) and rear outboard

quarter page art:0010616-B

Unfastening the Mustang convertible front outboard

2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to

half page art:0011198-A

Belt holder location — coupe only

[SR06805(M )05/94] 4. (Convertible only). Place the shoulder belt in

half page art:0010624-B

Belt holder location — convertible only

*[SR17700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Use only extensions manufactured by the same

% *[SR17800( ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint

*[SR18425( ALL)06/95] RWARNING

*[SR18450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[SR19230( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

*[SR19235( ALL)09/95] RWARNING

[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is

move the seat to the most rearward position if